+

WO1998027065A1 - Modulators of proteins with phosphotyrosine recognition units - Google Patents

Modulators of proteins with phosphotyrosine recognition units Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO1998027065A1
WO1998027065A1 PCT/US1996/020508 US9620508W WO9827065A1 WO 1998027065 A1 WO1998027065 A1 WO 1998027065A1 US 9620508 W US9620508 W US 9620508W WO 9827065 A1 WO9827065 A1 WO 9827065A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
compound
solvates
prodrugs
esters
alkyl
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US1996/020508
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Adnan Mjalli
Sepehr Sarshar
Xiaodong Cao
Farid Bakir
Original Assignee
Ontogen Corporation
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority to US08/543,630 priority Critical patent/US5770620A/en
Priority to EP96940489A priority patent/EP0833629A4/en
Application filed by Ontogen Corporation filed Critical Ontogen Corporation
Priority to EP96945409A priority patent/EP0946518A1/en
Priority to AU15667/97A priority patent/AU740425B2/en
Priority to US08/766,114 priority patent/US5753687A/en
Priority to PCT/US1996/020508 priority patent/WO1998027065A1/en
Priority to CA002275610A priority patent/CA2275610A1/en
Priority to JP52765098A priority patent/JP2001506997A/en
Publication of WO1998027065A1 publication Critical patent/WO1998027065A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C59/00—Compounds having carboxyl groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms and containing any of the groups OH, O—metal, —CHO, keto, ether, groups, groups, or groups
    • C07C59/40—Unsaturated compounds
    • C07C59/42—Unsaturated compounds containing hydroxy or O-metal groups
    • C07C59/52—Unsaturated compounds containing hydroxy or O-metal groups a hydroxy or O-metal group being bound to a carbon atom of a six-membered aromatic ring
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C235/00—Carboxylic acid amides, the carbon skeleton of the acid part being further substituted by oxygen atoms
    • C07C235/02—Carboxylic acid amides, the carbon skeleton of the acid part being further substituted by oxygen atoms having carbon atoms of carboxamide groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms and singly-bound oxygen atoms bound to the same carbon skeleton
    • C07C235/04—Carboxylic acid amides, the carbon skeleton of the acid part being further substituted by oxygen atoms having carbon atoms of carboxamide groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms and singly-bound oxygen atoms bound to the same carbon skeleton the carbon skeleton being acyclic and saturated
    • C07C235/12—Carboxylic acid amides, the carbon skeleton of the acid part being further substituted by oxygen atoms having carbon atoms of carboxamide groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms and singly-bound oxygen atoms bound to the same carbon skeleton the carbon skeleton being acyclic and saturated having the nitrogen atom of at least one of the carboxamide groups bound to an acyclic carbon atom of a hydrocarbon radical substituted by carboxyl groups
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C235/00—Carboxylic acid amides, the carbon skeleton of the acid part being further substituted by oxygen atoms
    • C07C235/02—Carboxylic acid amides, the carbon skeleton of the acid part being further substituted by oxygen atoms having carbon atoms of carboxamide groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms and singly-bound oxygen atoms bound to the same carbon skeleton
    • C07C235/32—Carboxylic acid amides, the carbon skeleton of the acid part being further substituted by oxygen atoms having carbon atoms of carboxamide groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms and singly-bound oxygen atoms bound to the same carbon skeleton the carbon skeleton containing six-membered aromatic rings
    • C07C235/34—Carboxylic acid amides, the carbon skeleton of the acid part being further substituted by oxygen atoms having carbon atoms of carboxamide groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms and singly-bound oxygen atoms bound to the same carbon skeleton the carbon skeleton containing six-membered aromatic rings having the nitrogen atoms of the carboxamide groups bound to hydrogen atoms or to acyclic carbon atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C235/00—Carboxylic acid amides, the carbon skeleton of the acid part being further substituted by oxygen atoms
    • C07C235/70—Carboxylic acid amides, the carbon skeleton of the acid part being further substituted by oxygen atoms having carbon atoms of carboxamide groups and doubly-bound oxygen atoms bound to the same carbon skeleton
    • C07C235/72—Carboxylic acid amides, the carbon skeleton of the acid part being further substituted by oxygen atoms having carbon atoms of carboxamide groups and doubly-bound oxygen atoms bound to the same carbon skeleton with the carbon atoms of the carboxamide groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms
    • C07C235/74—Carboxylic acid amides, the carbon skeleton of the acid part being further substituted by oxygen atoms having carbon atoms of carboxamide groups and doubly-bound oxygen atoms bound to the same carbon skeleton with the carbon atoms of the carboxamide groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms of a saturated carbon skeleton
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C235/00—Carboxylic acid amides, the carbon skeleton of the acid part being further substituted by oxygen atoms
    • C07C235/70—Carboxylic acid amides, the carbon skeleton of the acid part being further substituted by oxygen atoms having carbon atoms of carboxamide groups and doubly-bound oxygen atoms bound to the same carbon skeleton
    • C07C235/72—Carboxylic acid amides, the carbon skeleton of the acid part being further substituted by oxygen atoms having carbon atoms of carboxamide groups and doubly-bound oxygen atoms bound to the same carbon skeleton with the carbon atoms of the carboxamide groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms
    • C07C235/76—Carboxylic acid amides, the carbon skeleton of the acid part being further substituted by oxygen atoms having carbon atoms of carboxamide groups and doubly-bound oxygen atoms bound to the same carbon skeleton with the carbon atoms of the carboxamide groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms of an unsaturated carbon skeleton
    • C07C235/78—Carboxylic acid amides, the carbon skeleton of the acid part being further substituted by oxygen atoms having carbon atoms of carboxamide groups and doubly-bound oxygen atoms bound to the same carbon skeleton with the carbon atoms of the carboxamide groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms of an unsaturated carbon skeleton the carbon skeleton containing rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C59/00—Compounds having carboxyl groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms and containing any of the groups OH, O—metal, —CHO, keto, ether, groups, groups, or groups
    • C07C59/40—Unsaturated compounds
    • C07C59/76—Unsaturated compounds containing keto groups
    • C07C59/84—Unsaturated compounds containing keto groups containing six membered aromatic rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C59/00—Compounds having carboxyl groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms and containing any of the groups OH, O—metal, —CHO, keto, ether, groups, groups, or groups
    • C07C59/40—Unsaturated compounds
    • C07C59/76—Unsaturated compounds containing keto groups
    • C07C59/88—Unsaturated compounds containing keto groups containing halogen
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C69/00—Esters of carboxylic acids; Esters of carbonic or haloformic acids
    • C07C69/66—Esters of carboxylic acids having esterified carboxylic groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms and having any of the groups OH, O—metal, —CHO, keto, ether, acyloxy, groups, groups, or in the acid moiety
    • C07C69/73—Esters of carboxylic acids having esterified carboxylic groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms and having any of the groups OH, O—metal, —CHO, keto, ether, acyloxy, groups, groups, or in the acid moiety of unsaturated acids
    • C07C69/732—Esters of carboxylic acids having esterified carboxylic groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms and having any of the groups OH, O—metal, —CHO, keto, ether, acyloxy, groups, groups, or in the acid moiety of unsaturated acids of unsaturated hydroxy carboxylic acids
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C69/00—Esters of carboxylic acids; Esters of carbonic or haloformic acids
    • C07C69/66—Esters of carboxylic acids having esterified carboxylic groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms and having any of the groups OH, O—metal, —CHO, keto, ether, acyloxy, groups, groups, or in the acid moiety
    • C07C69/73—Esters of carboxylic acids having esterified carboxylic groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms and having any of the groups OH, O—metal, —CHO, keto, ether, acyloxy, groups, groups, or in the acid moiety of unsaturated acids
    • C07C69/738—Esters of keto-carboxylic acids or aldehydo-carboxylic acids
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C69/00—Esters of carboxylic acids; Esters of carbonic or haloformic acids
    • C07C69/76—Esters of carboxylic acids having a carboxyl group bound to a carbon atom of a six-membered aromatic ring
    • C07C69/84—Esters of carboxylic acids having a carboxyl group bound to a carbon atom of a six-membered aromatic ring of monocyclic hydroxy carboxylic acids, the hydroxy groups and the carboxyl groups of which are bound to carbon atoms of a six-membered aromatic ring
    • C07C69/92—Esters of carboxylic acids having a carboxyl group bound to a carbon atom of a six-membered aromatic ring of monocyclic hydroxy carboxylic acids, the hydroxy groups and the carboxyl groups of which are bound to carbon atoms of a six-membered aromatic ring with etherified hydroxyl groups
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D233/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazole or hydrogenated 1,3-diazole rings, not condensed with other rings
    • C07D233/54—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazole or hydrogenated 1,3-diazole rings, not condensed with other rings having two double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D233/64—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazole or hydrogenated 1,3-diazole rings, not condensed with other rings having two double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with substituted hydrocarbon radicals attached to ring carbon atoms, e.g. histidine
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D233/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazole or hydrogenated 1,3-diazole rings, not condensed with other rings
    • C07D233/54—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazole or hydrogenated 1,3-diazole rings, not condensed with other rings having two double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D233/66—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazole or hydrogenated 1,3-diazole rings, not condensed with other rings having two double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D233/90—Carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D241/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,4-diazine or hydrogenated 1,4-diazine rings
    • C07D241/36—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,4-diazine or hydrogenated 1,4-diazine rings condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems
    • C07D241/38—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,4-diazine or hydrogenated 1,4-diazine rings condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atoms
    • C07D241/40—Benzopyrazines
    • C07D241/42—Benzopyrazines with only hydrogen atoms, hydrocarbon or substituted hydrocarbon radicals, directly attached to carbon atoms of the hetero ring
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D263/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,3-oxazole rings
    • C07D263/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,3-oxazole rings not condensed with other rings
    • C07D263/30—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,3-oxazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D263/34—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,3-oxazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D277/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings
    • C07D277/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings not condensed with other rings
    • C07D277/20—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D277/22—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with only hydrogen atoms, hydrocarbon or substituted hydrocarbon radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D277/30—Radicals substituted by carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D307/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D307/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only ring hetero atom not condensed with other rings
    • C07D307/34—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only ring hetero atom not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D307/38—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only ring hetero atom not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with substituted hydrocarbon radicals attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D307/54—Radicals substituted by carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D403/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
    • C07D403/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D403/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D405/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D405/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D405/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D405/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D405/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing three or more hetero rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D409/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D409/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings
    • C07D409/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C2601/00—Systems containing only non-condensed rings
    • C07C2601/06—Systems containing only non-condensed rings with a five-membered ring
    • C07C2601/08—Systems containing only non-condensed rings with a five-membered ring the ring being saturated

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to novel protein tyrosine phosphatase modulating compounds, to methods for their preparation, to compositions comprising the compounds, to their use for treatment of human and animal disorders, to their use for purification of proteins or glycoproteins, and to their use in diagnosis.
  • the invention relates to modulation of the activity of molecules with phosphotyrosine recognition units, including protein tyrosine phosphatases (PTPases) and proteins with Src- homology-2 domains, in in vitro systems, microorganisms, eukaryoic cells, whole animals and human beings.
  • PTPases protein tyrosine phosphatases
  • Reversible phosphorylation of proteins is a prevalent biological mechanism for modulation of enzymatic activity in living organisms. Tonks et al., J. Biol. Chem., 263(14):6722-3 (1988).
  • PK protein kinase
  • PP protein phosphatase
  • PK's/PP's the protein serine/threonine kinases and protein serine/threonine phosphatases - have been shown to play critical roles in the regulation of metabolism. See generally, Cohen, Trends Biochem. Sci., 77:408-413
  • the protein tyrosine kinases/phosphatases comprise a second, distinct family of PK/PP enzymes of significant interest, and have been implicated in the control of normal and neoplastic cell growth and proliferation. See Fisher et al., Science,
  • PTK Protein tyrosine kinase
  • PTPases Protein tyrosine phosphatases
  • R- PTPases are generally grouped into two categories: those which have both an extracellular domain and an intracellular catalytic domain, the receptor PTPases (R- PTPases); and those which are entirely intracellular. For R-PTPases much effort has been directed at determining the function of the extracellular domain. Most of the R- PTPases contain extracellular domains which are structurally similar to domains found in known adhesion molecules; these domains include fibronectin type III repeats, immunoglobulin domains, and cadherin extracellular repeats. See generally Brady-Kalnay and Tonks, Curr. Opin. Cell. Biol. 7:650-657 (1995); Streuli, Curr.
  • Adherens junctions contain, among others, adhesion receptors termed cadherins which mediate cell-cell contact through homophilic binding; the cadherins associate with ⁇ -, ⁇ -, and ⁇ - catenins, intracellular proteins which interact with cortical actin. Association between cadherins and catenins serves to stabilize the adherens junction and to strengthen cell- cell contact. See generally Cowin, Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. 97: 10759-10761 (1994). Association of cadherin with ⁇ -catenin is decreased by tyrosine phosphorylation of ⁇ - catenin [Kinch et al, J. Cell.
  • PTPK and PTP ⁇ mediate cellular aggregation through homophilic binding [Brady-
  • the neuronal PTP ⁇ (which has also been called R-PTP ⁇ ) binds to contactin, a neuronal cell recognition molecule; binding of PTP ⁇ to contactin increases cell adhesion and neurite outgrowth. Peles et al, Cell 52:251-260 (1995).
  • PTP ⁇ (also known as phosphacan) binds the extracellular matrix protein tenascin [Barnea et al. J. Biol. Chem. 269: 14349-14352 (1994)], and the neural cell adhesion molecules N-CAM and Ng-CAM [Maurel et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 97:2512-2516 (1994)].
  • tenascin binds the extracellular matrix protein tenascin [Barnea et al. J. Biol. Chem. 269: 14349-14352 (1994)]
  • the neural cell adhesion molecules N-CAM and Ng-CAM Maurel et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 97:2512-2516 (1994)].
  • PTP ⁇ As the expression of PTP ⁇ is restricted to radial glial cells in the developing central nervous system, which are though to form barriers to neuronal migration during embryogenesis, it is
  • mice loss of SHPl function (the motheaten and viable motheaten phenotypes) causes multiple hematopoietic defects resulting in immunodeficiency and severe autoimmunity; culminating in lethality by 2-3 weeks or 2-3 months depending on the severity of SHPl deficiency.
  • these mice have reduced numbers of hematopoietic cells, suggesting defects in development and maturation, those cells which survive and enter the periphery are characterized by hyper-responsiveness to growth factors and antigen. This observation suggested a role for SHPl in negative regulation of hematopoietic signaling events.
  • EpoR erythropoietin receptor
  • cytokine receptor family which also includes the receptors for interleukins 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7; granulocyte-macrophage colony stimulating factor, and macrophage colony stimulating factor.
  • SHPl associates via its SH2 domains with tyrosine-phosphorylated EpoR, causing dephosphorylation and inactivation of the EpoR-associated Janus kinase 2 and termination of the cellular response to erythropoietin. Klingmuller et al, Cell 50:729-738 (1995).
  • Mutation of the tyrosine on the EpoR to which SHPl binds results in enhanced cell proliferation to erythropoietin in vitro [Klingmuller, supra].
  • mutation of the EpoR resulting in loss of association with SHPl causes autosomal dominant benign erythrocytosis, which is characterized by increased numbers of erythrocytes in the periphery and increased hematocrit. de la Chapelle et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.
  • SHPl also appears to be a negative regulator of the cellular response to colony stimulating factor- 1 (CSF-1, a major macrophage mitogenic cytokine), as cells from viable motheaten and motheaten mice, which have reduced or absent SHPl function, are hyper-responsive to CSF-1 in vitro.
  • CSF-1 colony stimulating factor- 1
  • Reduced SHPl expression also results in increased cellular response to interleukin 3 [Yi et al, Mol. Cell. Biol. 75:7577-7586 (1993)].
  • PTPases appear to play a homologous role in the insulin signaling pathway.
  • Treatment of adipocytes with the PTPase inhibitor vanadate results in increased tyrosine phosphorylation and tyrosine kinase activity of the insulin receptor (InsR), and enhances or mimics the cellular effects of insulin including increased glucose transport.
  • InsR insulin receptor
  • CD45 is abundantly expressed on the cell surface of all nucleated hematopoietic cells, in several alternative splice variants. T and B lymphocytes which lack CD45 expression are incapable of responding normally to antigen, suggesting that CD45 is required for antigen receptor signaling.
  • CD45 genetically engineered mice which lack expression of CD45 exhibit severe defects in T lymphocyte development and maturation, indicating an additional role for CD45 in thymopoiesis.
  • the major substrates for CD45 appear to be members of the Src family of PTK's, particularly
  • Lck and Fyn whose kinase activity is both positively and negatively regulated by tyrosine phosphorylation.
  • Lck and Fyn isolated from CD45-deficient cells are hyperphosphorylated on negative regulatory tyrosine residues, and their PTK activity is reduced.
  • CD45 can dephosphorylate and activate purified Lck and Fyn in vitro, these data suggest that CD45 maintains the activity of Lck and Fyn in vivo through dephosphorylation of these negative regulatory tyrosines and that this is an important mechanism for maintaining lymphocyte homeostasis.
  • a second PTPase which is now believed to play an important positive role in signal transduction is the intracellular, SH2 -domain-containing SHP2 (which has also been called SHPTP-2, SHPTP-3, syp, PTP2c, and PTP-1D [Adachi, et al., supra ⁇ ).
  • SHP2 associates, via its SH2 domains, with the receptor for platelet- derived growth factor (PDGF-R), the receptor for epidermal growth factor (EGF-R), with the insulin receptor, and with the predominant substrate of the InsR, insulin receptor substrate 1 (IRS1). Bennett, et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 97:7335-7339
  • SHP2 PTPase activity is required for cellular response to EGF and insulin, as competitive expression of inactive forms of SHP2 results in diminished signaling events and reduced cellular responses to EGF and insulin. Milarski and Saltiel, J.
  • PTP-IB overexpression has been correlated with breast and ovarian cancers [Weiner et al., J. Natl. Cancer Inst., 55:372-8 (1994); Weiner et al., Am J. Obstet. Gynecol, 770:1177-883 (1994)], and thus agents which modulate
  • PTP-IB activity would be helpful in elucidating the role of PTP-IB in these conditions and for the development of effective therapeutics against these disease states.
  • the important role of CD45 in hematopoietic development and T lymphocyte function likewise indicates a therapeutic utility for PTPase inhibitors in conditions that are associated with autoimmune disease, and as a prophylaxis for transplant rejection.
  • the antibiotic suramin which also appears to possess anti-neoplastic indications, has recently been shown to be a potent, irreversible, non-competitive inhibitor of CD45. See Ghosh and Miller, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm. 194:36-44 (1993).
  • the PTPase Yop2b is an essential virulence determinant in the pathogenic bacterium Yersinia, responsible for bubonic plague. Bliska et al, Proc. Natl. Acad Sci. USA, 55:1187-91 (1991), and thus an antimicrobial indication exists for PTPase inhibitor compounds, as well.
  • PTPases have been implicated in diabetic conditions.
  • PTPase inhibitors vanadium derivatives
  • metal-containing PTPase inhibitors act in a fairly non-specific fashion and act with similar potencies against all PTPase enzymes.
  • certain organic phosphotyrosine mimetics are reportedly capable of competitively inhibiting PTPase molecules when such mimetics are incorporated into polypeptide artificial PTPase substrates of 6-11 amino acid residues.
  • a "natural" (phosphorylated tyrosine) PTPase substrate which may be depicted by the Formula:
  • hexapeptide inhibitors nonetheless possess drawbacks for PTPase modulation in vivo. More particularly, the hexapeptide inhibitors described by Burke et al. are sufficiently large and anionic to potentially inhibit efficient migration across cell membranes, for interaction with the catalytic domains of transmembrane and intracellular PTPase enzymes which lie within a cell membrane. A need exists for small, organic-molecule based PTPase inhibitors having fewer anionic moieties, to facilitate migration across cell membranes.
  • the invention provides compounds and derivatives thereof useful for modulating, and especially inhibiting, the phosphatase activity of one or more protein tyrosine phosphatase (PTPase) and/or dual specificity phosphatase enzymes.
  • PTPase protein tyrosine phosphatase
  • the inventions further provides salts, esters, prodrugs, solvates, and the like of the compounds, and compositions comprising these compounds.
  • derivatives means: aryl acrylic acids with structure depicted in Formula (Al) having substitution (with, e.g., hydrogen, hydroxy, halo, amino, carboxy, nitro, cyano, methoxy, etc.) at one or more atoms of the aryl ring.
  • substitution with, e.g., hydrogen, hydroxy, halo, amino, carboxy, nitro, cyano, methoxy, etc.
  • Al having substitution at the alkene carbons with, e.g., an electron withdrawing group (e.g., Cl, F, Br, CF 3 , phenyl) or an electron donating group (e.g., CH 3 , alkoxy).
  • an electron withdrawing group e.g., Cl, F, Br, CF 3 , phenyl
  • an electron donating group e.g., CH 3 , alkoxy
  • attachment signifies a stable covalent bond, certain preferred points of attachment being apparent to those skilled in the art.
  • halogen or halo include fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine.
  • alkyl includes Ci-C ⁇ straight chain saturated and C 2 -C ⁇ unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbon groups, C[-Cn branched saturated and C 2 -C ⁇ unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbon groups, C -C 8 cyclic saturated and C 5 -C 8 unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbon groups, and C]-Cn straight chain or branched saturated and C 2 -C ⁇ straight chain or branched unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbon groups substituted with C 3 -C 8 cyclic saturated and unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbon groups having the specified number of carbon atoms.
  • this definition shall include but is not limited to methyl (Me), ethyl (Et), propyl (Pr), butyl (Bu), pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, undecyl, ethenyl, propenyl, butenyl, penentyl, hexenyl, heptenyl, octenyl, nonenyl, decenyl, undecenyl, isopropyl (i-Pr), isobutyl (i-Bu), tert-butyl (t-Bu), sec-butyl (s-Bu), isopentyl, neopentyl, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, cyclooctyl, cyclopentenyl, cyclohexeny
  • substituted alkyl represents an alkyl group as defined above wherein the substitutents are independently selected from halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, carbamoyl, C 0- ⁇ alkyloxy, arylC 0- nalkyloxy, C 0 - nalkylthio, arylC 0- iialkylthio, C 0- nalkylamino, arylC 0- nalkylamino, di(arylC 0- ⁇ alkyl)amino, .
  • alkyloxy (e.g. methoxy, ethoxy, propyloxy, allyloxy, cyclohexyloxy) represents an alkyl group as defined above having the indicated number of carbon atoms attached through an oxygen bridge.
  • alkyloxyalkyl represents an alkyloxy group attached through an alkyl group as defined above having the indicated number of carbon atoms.
  • alkylthio (e.g. methylthio, ethylthio, propylthio, cyclohexenylthio and the like) represents an alkyl group as defined above having the indicated number of carbon atoms attached through a sulfur bridge.
  • alkylthioalkyl represents an alkylthio group attached through an alkyl group as defined above having the indicated number of carbon atoms.
  • alkylamino (e.g. methylamino, diethylamino, butylamino, N- propyl-N-hexylamino, (2-cyclopentyl)propylamino, hexenylamino, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl and the like) represents one or two alkyl groups as defined above having the indicated number of carbon atoms attached through an amine bridge.
  • the two alkyl groups maybe taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 11 carbon atoms with at least one C Cnalkyl, arylCo-C ⁇ alkyl substituent.
  • alkylaminoalkyl represents an alkylamino group attached through an alkyl group as defined above having the indicated number of carbon atoms.
  • alkylcarbonyl (e.g. cyclooctylcarbonyl, pentylcarbonyl, 3- hexenylcarbonyl) represents an alkyl group as defined above having the indicated number of carbon atoms attached through a carbonyl group.
  • alkylcarbonylalkyl represents an alkylcarbonyl group attached through an alkyl group as defined above having the indicated number of carbon atoms.
  • alkylcarboxy (e.g. heptylcarboxy, cyclopropylcarboxy, 3- pentenylcarboxy) represents an alkylcarbonyl group as defined above wherein the carbonyl is in turn attached through an oxygen.
  • alkylcarboxy alkyl represents an alkylcarboxy group attached through an alkyl group as defined above having the indicated number of carbon atoms.
  • alkylcarbonylamino (e.g. hexylcarbonylamino, cyclopentylcarbonyl-aminomethyl, methylcarbonylaminophenyl) represents an alkylcarbonyl group as defined above wherein the carbonyl is in turn attached through the nitrogen atom of an amino group.
  • the nitrogen group may itself be substituted with an alkyl or aryl group.
  • alkylcarbonylaminoalkyl represents an alkylcarbonylamino group attached through an alkyl group as defined above having the indicated number of carbon atoms.
  • the nitrogen group may itself be substituted with an alkyl or aryl group.
  • aryl represents an unsubstituted, mono-, di- or trisubstituted monocyclic, polycyclic, biaryl and heterocyclic aromatic groups covalently attached at any ring position capable of forming a stable covalent bond, certain preferred points of attachment being apparent to those skilled in the art (e.g., 3-indolyl, 4- imidazolyl).
  • the aryl substituents are independently selected from the group consisting of halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl, hydroxypyronyl, Cj. ⁇ alkyl, arylC
  • iialkyl C 0- ⁇ alkyloxyC 0- ⁇ alkyl, arylC 0- ⁇ alkyloxyC 0- ⁇ alkyl, C 0- ⁇ alkylthioC 0- ⁇ alkyl, arylC 0- ⁇ ⁇ alkylthioCo- 1 ⁇ alkyl, C 0-1 ⁇ alkylaminoC 0- ⁇ l ⁇ lkyl, arylC 0- ⁇ alky laminoC 0- 11 alkyl, d ⁇ arylC ⁇ alky ⁇ aminoCo-nalky 1 , Ci_nalkylcarbonylCo.i l alkyl, a ry ICj.
  • nalkylcarbonylCo.ii alkyl Ci.nalkylcarboxyCo-iialkyl, arylC ⁇ nalkylcarboxyCo. nalkyl, Ci.nalkylcarbonylaminoCo.ii alkyl, arylCi.nalkylcarbonylaminoCo.ii alkyl, - C 0 . ⁇ alkylCOOR 4 , -C 0 . ⁇ alkylCONR 5 R 6 wherein ⁇ , R 5 and R ⁇ are independently selected from hydrogen, C Cn alkyl, arylC 0 -C n alkyl, or R 5 and R ⁇ are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one CpCj j alkyl, arylC 0 -C ⁇ j alkyl substituent.
  • aryl includes but is not limited to phenyl, biphenyl, naphthyl, dihydronaphthyl, tetrahydronaphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, azulenyl, anthryl, phenanthryl, fluorenyl, pyrenyl, thienyl, benzothienyl, isobenzothienyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzothienyl, furyl, pyranyl, benzofuranyl, isobenzofuranyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzofuranyl, pyrrolyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, indolizinyl, indazolyl, imidazolyl, benzimidazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyradazinyl, pyrimidinyl, triazinyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl,
  • arylalkyl e.g. (4-hydroxyphenyl)ethyl, (2-aminonaphthyl)hexenyl, pyridylcyclopentyl
  • arylcarbonyl e.g. 2-thiophenylcarbonyl, 3 - methoxyanthrylcarbonyl, oxazolylcarbonyl
  • arylalkylcarbonyl e.g. (2,3-dimethoxyphenyl)propylcarbonyl, (2- chloronaphthyl)pentenylcarbonyl, imidazolylcyclopentylcarbonyl
  • alkyl group is in turn attached through a carbonyl.
  • signal transduction is a collective term used to define all cellular processes that follow the activation of a given cell or tissue.
  • Examples of signal transduction include but are not in any way limited to cellular events that are induced by polypeptide hormones and growth factors (e.g. insulin, insulin-like growth factors I and II, growth hormone, epidermal growth factor, platelet-derived growth factor), cytokines (e.g. interleukines), extracellular matrix components, and cell-cell interactions.
  • Phosphotyrosine recognition units/tyrosine phosphate recognition units/phosphotyrosine recognition units are defined as areas or domains of proteins or glycoproteins that have affinity for molecules containing phosphorylated tyrosine residues (pTyr).
  • Examples of pTyr recognition units include but are not in any way limited to: PTPases, SH2 domains and PTB domains.
  • PTPases are defined as enzymes with the capacity to dephosphorylate pTyr- containing proteins or glycoproteins.
  • Examples of PTPases include but are not in any way limited to: intracellular PTPases (e.g. PTP-IB, TC-PTP, PTP-1C, PTP-1D,PTP- Dl, PTP-D2), receptor-type PTPases (e.g. PTP ⁇ , PTP ⁇ , PTP ⁇ , PTP ⁇ , CD45, PTPK, PTP ⁇ ), dual specificity phosphatases (e.g. VH1, VHR, cdc25) and other PTPases such as LAR, SHP-1, SHP-2, PTP-1H, PTPMEGI, PTP-PEST, PTP ⁇ , PTPS31, IA-2 and
  • Modulation of cellular processes is defined as the capacity of compounds of the invention to 1) either increase or decrease ongoing, normal or abnormal, signal transduction, 2) initiate normal signal transduction, and 3) initiate abnormal signal transduction.
  • Modulation of pTyr-mediated signal transduction/modulation of the activity of molecules with pTyr recognition units is defined as the capacity of compounds of the invention to 1) increase or decrease the activity of proteins or glycoproteins with pTyr recognition units (e.g. PTPases, SH2 domains or PTB domains) or to 2) decrease or increase the association of a pTyr-containing molecule with a protein or glycoprotein with pTyr recognition units either via a direct action on the pTyr recognition site or via an indirect mechanism.
  • proteins or glycoproteins with pTyr recognition units e.g. PTPases, SH2 domains or PTB domains
  • Examples of modulation of pTyr-mediated signal transduction/modulation of the activity of molecules with pTyr recognition units are: a) inhibition of PTPase activity leading to either increased or decreased signal transduction of ongoing cellular processes; b) inhibition of PTPase activity leading to initiation of normal or abnormal cellular activity; c) stimulation of PTPase activity leading to either increased or decreased signal transduction of ongoing cellular processes; d) stimulation of PTPase activity leading to initiation of normal or abnormal cellular activity; e) inhibition of binding of SH2 domains or PTB domains to proteins or glycoproteins with pTyr leading to increase or decrease of ongoing cellular processes; f) inhibition of binding of SH2 domains or PTB domains to proteins or glycoproteins with pTyr leading to initiation of normal or abnormal cellular activity.
  • a subject is defined as any mammalian species, including humans.
  • R and R are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, alkyl, arylalkyl,
  • R'" is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl
  • Y is selected from hydrogen or
  • R , R , R and X are defined as above in Formula (Al), and wherein the remaining of Ri, R 2 and R 3 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl.
  • a class of preferred PTPase activity- modulating compounds have the general structural Formula depicted in (A3):
  • R , R , R and X are defined as above in Formula (Al), and wherein the remaining of R 1 ? R 2 and R 3 are independently selected from the group consisting ofhydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkylcarbonyl, substituted alkylcarbonyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylcarbonyl, arylalkylcarbonyl.
  • a class of preferred PTPase activity- modulating compounds have the general structural Formula depicted in (A4):
  • R , R , R and X are defined as above in Formula (Al), and wherein the remaining of Rj, R 2 is defined as above in Formula (A2).
  • a class of preferred PTPase activity- modulating compounds have the general structural Formula depicted in (A5):
  • R , R , R and X are defined as above in Formula (Al), and wherein the remaining of Rj . and R 2 is defined as above in Formula (A2).
  • a class of preferred PTPase activity- modulating compounds have the general structural Formula depicted in (A6):
  • R 2 (A6) wherein at least one of R R 2 , R 3 and R 4 substituents has the general structure depicted in Formula (B)
  • R , R , R and X are defined as above in Formula (Al), and wherein the remaining of Ri, R 2 , R 3 and » have the same definition as Rj, R 2 and R 3 in Formula (A2), with the proviso that when R 3 and R 4 are selected from substituted phenyl or substituted furyl then the phenyl and furyl substituents exclude hydroxy, halo, trifluoromethyl, C]- alkyl, C ⁇ -6 alkyloxy, C ⁇ -6 alkylthio, amino, C ⁇ alkylamino, di(C ⁇ . 6 alkyl)amino, pheny!C ⁇ -6 alkylamino and di(phenylC 1-6 alkyl)amino.
  • a class of preferred PTPase activity- modulating compounds have the general structural Formula depicted in (A6):
  • R 4 is selected from -COR 5 , -COOR 6 , -CONR 7 R 8 wherein R 5 thru R 8 are selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, or R 7 and R 8 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl substituent, and wherein at least one of Rj, R 2 , and R 3 substituents has the general structure depicted in Formula (B)
  • R , R , R and X are defined as above in Formula (Al), and wherein the remaining of R b R 2 and R 3 are defined as above in Formula (A2).
  • a class of preferred PTPase activity- modulating compounds have the general structural Formula depicted in (A6):
  • a class of preferred PTPase activity- modulating compounds have the general structural Formula depicted in (A7):
  • R 2 is selected from -COR 5 , -COOR 6 , -CONR 7 R 8 wherein R 5 thru R 8 are defined as above in (6) and wherein at least one of R] and R 3 substituents has the general structure depicted in Formula (B)
  • R , R , R and X are defined as above in Formula (Al), and wherein the remaining of R) and R are defined as above in Formula (A2).
  • R , R , R and X are defined as above in Formula (Al), and wherein the remaining of Ri and R 2 is defined as above in Formula (A2), and wherein m is an integer between 0 and 4 and each R 3 is independently selected from the group consisting of halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl, hydroxypyronyl, alkyl, arylalkyl, C 0- nalkyloxyCo-ii alkyl, arylC 0- ⁇ alkyloxyC 0- ⁇ alkyl, Co - ⁇ alkylthioCo-nalkyl, arylC 0 .
  • iialkylthioCo-nalkyl C 0 .nalkylaminoCo-n alkyl, arylCo .nalkylaminoC 0- ⁇ alkyl, i jalkylcarbonylC 0- ⁇ ⁇ alkyl, Cj.i i alkylcarboxy C 0- ⁇ l alkyl, ary l .i ⁇ alkylcarboxy C 0- l ialkyl, C ⁇ nalkylcarbonylaminoCo-n alkyl, arylC ⁇ .nalkylcarbonylaminoC 0 . ⁇ alkyl, -
  • C 0- ⁇ alkylCOOR , -Co.ualkylCONR 5 R 6 wherein j, R 5 and Rg are independently selected from hydrogen, CpCn alkyl, ary lC 0 -C ⁇ alkyl, or R 5 and R(, are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one CpCnalkyl, arylC 0 -Cn alkyl substituent.
  • R] is selected from -COR 5 , -COOR 6 , -CONR 7 R 8 wherein R 5 thru R 8 are defined as above in (6) and wherein R 2 has the general structure depicted in Formula (B)
  • a class of preferred PTPase activity- modulating compounds have the general structural Formula depicted in (A9):
  • a class of preferred PTPase activity- modulating compounds have the general structural Formula depicted in (A9):
  • R ⁇ or R 2 is selected from -COR 5 , -COORg, -CONR 7 R 8 wherein R 5 thru R 8 are defined as in (6) and wherein the remainder of Rj and R 2 is defined as above in (9), and wherein m is an integer between 0 and 3 and each R 3 is defined as above in (9).
  • a class of preferred PTPase activity- modulating compounds have the general structural Formula depicted in (A10):
  • R , R , R and X are defined as above in Formula (Al), and wherein the remaining of Ri, R 2 is defined as above in Formula (A2), and wherein R 3 , j, R 5 , Rg are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkylcarbonyl, substituted alkylcarbonyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylcarbonyl, arylalkylcarbonyl.
  • a class of preferred PTPase activity - modulating compounds have the general structural Formula depicted in (Al 1):
  • R , R , R and X are defined as above in Formula (Al), and wherein the remaining of R ls R 2 and R 3 are defined as above in Formula (A2).
  • compositions of the invention include compositions comprising compounds as defined above in structural formula (Al), (A2), (A3), (A4), (A5), (A6),
  • novel compounds which modulate the activity of PTPase or other molecules with pTyr recognition unit(s) as well as previously known aryl acrylic acid compounds which modulate the activity of PTPase or other molecules with pTyr recognition unit(s).
  • compositions comprising PTPase modulating compounds of the invention suitable for administration to a mammalian host.
  • the compounds of the invention act as inhibitors of PTPases, e.g. protein tyrosine phosphatases involved in the regulation of tyrosine kinase signaling pathways.
  • PTPases e.g. protein tyrosine phosphatases involved in the regulation of tyrosine kinase signaling pathways.
  • Preferred embodiments include modulation of receptor- tyrosine kinase signaling pathways via interaction with regulatory PTPases, e.g.
  • Another preferred embodiments of the invention is modulation of non-receptor tyrosine kinase signaling through modulation of regulatory PTPases, e.g. modulation of members of the Src kinase family.
  • One type of preferred embodiments of the invention relates to modulation of the activity of PTPases that negatively regulate signal transduction pathways.
  • Another type of preferred embodiments of the inventions relate to modulation of the activity of PTPases that positively regulate signale transduction pathways.
  • compounds of the inventions act as modulators of the active site of PTPases.
  • the compounds of the invention modulate the activity of PTPases via interaction with structures positioned outside the active sites of the enzymes, preferably SH2 domains.
  • Further preferred embodiments include modulation of signal transduction pathways via binding of the compounds of the invention to SH2 domains or PTB domains of non-PTPase signaling molecules.
  • Other preferred embodiments include use of the compounds of the invention for modulation of cell-cell interactions as well as cell-matrix interactions.
  • the compounds of the invention may be used as therapeutics to inhibit PTPases involved in the regulation of the insulin recptor tyrosine kinase signaling pathway in patients with type I diabetes, type II diabetes, impaired glucose tolerance, insuline resistance and obesity.
  • Further preferred embodiments include use of the compounds of the invention for treatment of disorders with general or specific dysfunction of PTPase activity, e.g. proliferative disorders including neoplastic diseases and psoriosis.
  • the compounds of the invention may be used in pharmaceutical preparations for treatment of osteoporosis.
  • Preferred embodiments of the invention further include use of compounds of the invention in pharmaceutical preparations to increase the secretion or action of growth hormone and its analogs or somatomedins including IGf-I and IGF-2 by modulating the activity of PTPases or other signal transduction molecules with affinity for phosphotyrosine involved controlling or inducing the action of these hormones or any regulating molecule.
  • compounds of the invention can be administered for purposes of stimulating the release of growth hormone from the pituitary or increase its action on target tissues thereby leading to similar effects or uses as growth hormone itself.
  • the uses of growth hormone maybe summarized as follows: stimulation of growth hormone release in the elderly; prevention of catabolic side effects of glucocorticoids; treatment of osteoporosis, stimulation of the immune system; treatment of retardation, accelaration of wound healing; accelerating bone fracture repair; treatment of growth retardation; treating renal failure or insufficiency resulting in growth retardation; treatment of physiological short stature including growth hormone deficient children and short stature associated with chronic illness; treatment of obesity and growth retardation associated with obesity; treating growth retardation associated with the Pader-Willi syndrom and Turner's syndrom; accelerating the recovery and reducing hospitalization of burn patients; treatment of intrauterine growth retardation, skeletal dysplasia, hypercortisolism and Cushings syndrome; induction of pulsatile growth hormone release; replacement of growth hormone in stressed patients; treatment of osteochondro-dysplasis, Noonans syndrome, schizophrenia, depressions, Alzheimer's disease, delayed wound healing and psychosocial deprivation; treatment of pulmonary dysfunction and ventilator
  • the compounds of the invention may be used in pharmaceutical preparations for treatment of various disorders of the immune system, either as stimulant or suppresor of normal or perturbed immune functions, including autoimmune reactions. Further embodiments of the invention for treatment of allergic reactions, e.g. asthma, dermal reactions, conjunctivitis.
  • allergic reactions e.g. asthma, dermal reactions, conjunctivitis.
  • compounds of the invention may be used in pharmaceutical preparations for prevention or induction of platelet aggregation.
  • compounds of the invention may be used in pharmaceutical preparations for treatment of infectious disorders.
  • the compounds of the invention may be used for treatment of infectious disorders caused by Yersinia and other bacteria as well as disorders caused by viruses or other microorganisms.
  • Compounds of the invention may additionally be used for treatment or prevention of diseases in animals, including commercially important animals.
  • Also included in the present invention is a process for isolation of PTPases via affinity purification procedures based on the use of immobilized compounds of the invention using procedures well-known to those skilled in the art.
  • the invention is further directed to a method for detecting the presence of PTPases in cell or in a subject comprising
  • the invention further relates to analysis and identification of the specific functions of certain PTPases by modulating their activity by using compounds of the invention in cellular assay systems or in whole animals.
  • the invention further provides methods for making compounds (Al), (A2), (A3), (A4), (A5), (A6), (A7), (A8), (A9), (AlO), (Al l) of the present invention having PTPase-modulatory/inhibitory activity.
  • compounds of the invention are synthesized in a multi-component combinatorial array, which permits rapid synthesis of numerous, structurally related compounds for subsequent evaluation.
  • the acrylic acid moiety of a compound is protected during synthesis by, e.g., esterification with a tert-butyl protecting group.
  • a preferred method of making compounds of the invention comprises use of a protected acrylic acid reagent and removal of the protective group by, e.g., treatment of a precursor ester compound with acid.
  • a method includes further esterifying or salifying the acrylic acid product thereby obtained.
  • the compounds of formula (Al), (A2), (A3), (A4), (A5), (A6), (A7), (A8), (A9), (AlO), (Al 1) may be prepared by procedures known to those skilled in the art from known compounds or readily preparable intermediates. General synthetic procedures and examples are as follow:
  • tert-butyl esters were converted to their corresponding carboxylic acids via treatment with a solution of 50% trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane for 1 hour at 23°C. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the residue was azeotroped with toluene or acetonitrile to yield the corresponding carboxylic acid.
  • reaction may be carried out neat or in a solvent such as dimethylformamide (DMF), tetrahydrofuran (THF), or toluene, in the presence of a catalyst (e.g. Pd(OAc) 2 , Pd(PPh 3 ) 4 , Pd 2 dba 3 ), a ligand (e.g. Ph 3 P, Ph 3 As, (o-tolyl) 3 P) and a base (e.g. K 2 CO 3 , CsCC» 3 , Et 3 N) at temperatures ranging from 23°C to 130°C, for 1 to 60 hours.
  • a catalyst e.g. Pd(OAc) 2 , Pd(PPh 3 ) 4 , Pd 2 dba 3
  • a ligand e.g. Ph 3 P, Ph 3 As, (o-tolyl) 3 P
  • a base e.g. K 2 CO 3 , CsCC» 3 , Et 3 N
  • the reaction mixture was heated at 100°C for 12 hours, cooled to 23 °C and the solvent was removed in vacuo. Ethyl acetate was added and the organic layer was washed with water and dried over sodium sulfate. The solvent was removed and the residue (mixture of dibromobenzil, mono and bis-tert-butylacrylate benzil) was recrystallized from hot 30% dichloromethane in hexane. The solid which crashed out (mixture of dibromobenzil and mono-tert-butylacrylate benzil) was filtered off and treated with 20% trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane.
  • These reactions may be carried out on functionalized cross linked polystyrene polymers such as Merrifield resin, Wang resin, Rink resin, TentagelTM resin, in a solvent such as dimethylformamide (DMF), tetrahydrofuran (THF), or toluene, in the presence of a catalyst (e.g. Pd(OAc) 2 , Pd(PPh 3 ) 4 , Pd 2 dba 3 ), a ligand (e.g. Ph 3 P, Ph 3 As, (o-tolyl) 3 P) and a base (e.g. K 2 CO 3 , CsCO 3 , Et 3 N) at temperatures ranging from 23°C to 130°C, for 1 to 60 hours.
  • a catalyst e.g. Pd(OAc) 2 , Pd(PPh 3 ) 4 , Pd 2 dba 3
  • a ligand e.g. Ph 3 P, Ph 3 As, (o-tolyl) 3 P
  • the resin was filtered and thoroughly washed with dichloromethane (500mL), methanol (500mL), dimethylformamide (500mL), dichloromethane (500mL) and methanol (500mL) and dried in vacuo (O.lmmHg) for 24 hours.
  • the coupling was repeated and resin 15 was filtered, washed and dried as above, and used directly in the next step.
  • the resin was filtered hot and washed thoroughly with hot dimethylformamide (500mL), hot acetic acid (500mL), methanol (500mL), dichloromethane (500mL), dimethylformamide (500mL), dichloromethane
  • the resin was filtered hot and washed thoroughly with hot dimethylformamide (500mL), hot acetic acid (500mL), methanol (500mL), dichloromethane (500mL), dimethylformamide (500mL), dichloromethane (500mL) and methanol (500mL) and dried in vacuo (O.lmmHg) for 24 hours.
  • the linker was cleaved from the resin with a solution of 20% trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane for 20min at ambient temperature.
  • ⁇ NMR for diacid linker 400 MHz, dg-DMSO) ⁇ 6.7 (d, 2H), 7.6 (d, 2H), 7.9 (s, 8H).
  • the resin was filtered hot and washed thoroughly with hot dimethylformamide (50mL), water (50mL), 10% sodium bicarbonate (50mL), 10% aqueous acetic acid (50mL), water (50mL), methanol (50mL), dichloromethane (50mL), methanol (50mL), dichloromethane (50mL) and dried in vacuo (O.lmmHg) for 24 hours.
  • the linker was cleaved from the resin with a solution of 20% trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane for 20min at ambient temperature.
  • ⁇ NMR for diacid linker 400 MHz, dg-DMSO) ⁇ 6.7 (d, 2H), 7.6 (d, 2H), 7.9 (s, 8H).
  • Resin 18 was treated with a 1.0M solution of oxalyl chloride in dichloromethane in the presence of a catalytic amount of dimethylformamide for 1 hour and filtered. The resin was subsequently treated with a dichloromethane solution containing the alcohol (ROH), pyridine and 4-dimethylaminopyridine for 20 hours at
  • Resin 18 was treated with a 1.0M solution of oxalyl chloride in dichloromethane in the presence of a catalytic amount of dimethylformamide for 1 hour and filtered. The resin was subsequently treated with a dichloromethane solution containing the aromatic amine (ArN(Rj)H), pyridine and 4-dimethylaminopyridine for 20 hours at 23°C to yield the monoamide resin 20.
  • Resin 18 was treated with a dichloromethane solution containing the amine (R]R 2 NH), EDCI and 4-dimethylamino ⁇ yridine for 20 hours at 23 °C to yield the monoamide resin 21.
  • reaction may be carried out in a solvent or combination of solvents such as tetrahydrofuran (THF), dichloromethane (CH 2 C1 2 ), in the presence of a catalyst (e.g. TiCl 3 ), and a base (e.g. pyridine) at temperatures ranging from -78°C to 23°C, for 1 to 60 hours.
  • solvents such as tetrahydrofuran (THF), dichloromethane (CH 2 C1 2 )
  • a catalyst e.g. TiCl 3
  • a base e.g. pyridine
  • the first step in this reaction may be carried out in a solvent such as tetrahydrofuran (THF), dichloromethane (CH 2 C1 2 ), in the presence of diisopropyl carbodiimide (DIC) and a base (e.g. 4-dimethylaminopyridine) at temperatures ranging from 0°C to 23 °C, for 1 to 60 hours.
  • the second step in this reaction may be carried out in a solvent such as dichloromethane (CH 2 C1 2 ), in the presence of an oxidizing reagent (e.g. tetrapropylammonium perruthenate (VII) (TPAP)) and activated 4A molecular sieves at temperatures ranging from 0°C to 23°C, for 1 to 60 hours.
  • a solvent such as tetrahydrofuran (THF), dichloromethane (CH 2 C1 2 )
  • DIC diisopropyl carbodiimide
  • a base e
  • Hydroxyester 24 (1 equiv) was oxidized to ketoester 26 at 23°C in CH 2 C1 2 , in the presence of catalytic amount of TPAP (0.1 equiv), N-methylmorpholine oxide (2 equiv) and 4A activated powdered molecular sieves (500mg/mol of substrate).
  • ⁇ NMR of 26 400MHz, CDC1 3 ) ⁇ 1.55 (s, 18H), 3.8 (s, 3H), 6.25 (d, IH), 6.29 (d, IH), 6.9 (d, 2H), 7.0 (s, IH), 7.5 (m, 10H), 7.95 (d, IH), 8.02 (d, IH).
  • the first step in this reaction may be carried out in a solvent or a combination of solvents such as tetrahydrofuran (THF), dichloromethane (CH 2 C1 2 ), in the presence of a catalyst (e.g. TiCl 3 ), and a base (e.g. pyridine) at temperatures ranging from - 78°C to 23°C, for 1 to 60 hours.
  • the second step in this reaction may be carried out in a solvent such as dichloromethane (CH 2 C1 2 ), in the presence of an oxidizing reagent (e.g. tetrapropylammonium perruthenate (VII) (TPAP)) and activated 4A molecular sieves at temperatures ranging from 0°C to 23 °C, for 1 to 60 hours.
  • a solvent or a combination of solvents such as tetrahydrofuran (THF), dichloromethane (CH 2 C1 2 ), in the presence of a catalyst (e.g.
  • reaction may be carried out in a solvent or a combination of solvents such as dichloromethane (CH 2 C1 2 ), chloroform (CHC1 3 ), methanol (MeOH), tetrahydrofuran (THF) or acetonitrile (CH 3 CN), in the presence or absence of a catalyst (e.g. ZnCl 2 , MgBr 2 ) at temperatures ranging from -78°C to 80°C, for 1 to 60 hours.
  • a catalyst e.g. ZnCl 2 , MgBr 2
  • reaction may be carried out in a solvent or combination of solvents such as tetrahydrofuran (THF), dichloromethane (CH 2 C1 2 ), in the presence of a catalyst (e.g. TiCl 3 ), and a base (e.g. pyridine) at temperatures ranging from -78°C to 23 °C, for 1 to 60 hours.
  • solvents such as tetrahydrofuran (THF), dichloromethane (CH 2 C1 2 )
  • a catalyst e.g. TiCl 3
  • a base e.g. pyridine
  • This reaction may be carried out on functionalized cross linked polystyrene polymers such as Merrifield resin, Wang resin, Rink resin, TentagelTM resin, in a solvent such as acetic acid (AcOH) at temperatures ranging from 23 °C to 120°C, for 1 to 60 hours.
  • a solvent such as acetic acid (AcOH) at temperatures ranging from 23 °C to 120°C, for 1 to 60 hours.
  • the product maybe released from the polymer using conditions known to those skilled in the art.
  • R l s R 2 , R 3 and 4 are defined as above in formula (A6).
  • the first step in this reaction may be carried out on functionalized cross linked polystyrene resins such as Merrifield resin, Wang resin, Rink resin, TentagelTM resin, in a solvent or a combination of solvents such as dichloromethane (CH 2 C1 2 ), chloroform (CHC1 ), methanol (MeOH), tetrahydrofuran (THF) or acetonitrile (CH 3 CN), in the presence or absence of a catalyst (e.g. ZnCl 2 , MgBr 2 ) at temperatures ranging from -78°C to 80°C, for 1 to 60 hours.
  • the second step in this reaction may be carried out in a solvent such as acetic acid (AcOH) at temperatures ranging from 23°C to 120°C, for 1 to 60 hours.
  • the first step in this reaction reaction may be carried out in a solvent or a combination of solvents such as dichloromethane (CH 2 C1 2 ), chloroform (CHC1 3 ), methanol (MeOH), tetrahydrofuran (THF), acetonitrile (CH 3 CN), in the presence or absence of a catalyst (e.g. ZnCl 2 , MgBr 2 ) at temperatures ranging from -78°C to 80°C, for 1 to 60 hours.
  • a catalyst e.g. ZnCl 2 , MgBr 2
  • the second step in this reaction may be carried out in a solvent such as acetic acid (AcOH) at temperatures ranging from 23 °C to 120°C, for 1 to 60 hours.
  • the first step in this reaction reaction may be carried out in a solvent or a combination of solvents such as dichloromethane (CH 2 C1 2 ), chloroform (CHC1 3 ), methanol (MeOH), tetrahydrofuran (THF), acetonitrile (CH 3 CN), in the presence or absence of a catalyst (e.g. ZnCl , MgBr 2 ) at temperatures ranging from -78°C to 80°C, for 1 to 60 hours.
  • a catalyst e.g. ZnCl , MgBr 2
  • the second step in this reaction may be carried out in a solvent such as acetic acid (AcOH) at temperatures ranging from 23 °C to 120°C, for 1 to 60 hours.
  • reaction may be carried out in a solvent or a combination of solvents such as dioxane or acetic acid (AcOH) at temperatures ranging from 23 °C to 120°C, for 1 to 60 hours.
  • solvents such as dioxane or acetic acid (AcOH)
  • the first step in this sequence of reactions may be carried out in a solvent such as tetrahydrofuran (THF), dichloromethane (CH 2 C1 2 ), in the presence of a base (e.g. 4,4-dimethylaminopyridine, triethylamine, triisopropylamine) and a sulfonyl chloride (e.g. tosyl chloride, mesyl chloride), at temperatures ranging from -20°C to 23°C, for 1 to 60 hours.
  • the second step in this sequence of reactions may be carried out in a solvent such as dichloromethane (CH 2 C1 2 ), in the presence of an oxidizing reagent (e.g.
  • TPAP tetrapropylammonium perruthenate
  • VI tetrapropylammonium perruthenate
  • the third step in this sequence of reactions may be carried out in a solvent such as acetic acid, toluene, dioxane at temperatures ranging from 0°C to 120°C, for 1 to 60 hours.
  • a human placental cDNA library was synthesized in a 50 ul reaction containing 1 ug human placental poly(A) + mRNA (Clontech, Palo Alto, CA), 4 ul random hexamer primers, 8 ul of lOmM dNTPs (Pharmacia, Piscataway NJ), lul (200 U/ul) Moloney murine leukemia virus reverse transcriptase (Gibco-BRL, Canada), 0.5 ul (26 U/ul) RNAsin (Promega, Madison WI), and 12 ul 5x buffer (Gibco-BRL). The synthesis reaction was incubated at 37 ° C for one hour and then heat inactivated at 95 ° C for five minutes.
  • a PTP-IB cDNA was amplified, using polymerase chain reaction (PCR), from the cDNAs synthesized as described above. More particularly, based on the published sequence of PTB- IB, two PCR primers were synthesized to amplify a portion of the PTP-IB coding sequence known to encode a 321 amino acid fragment containing the PTP-IB catalytic domain and having PTPase activity. See Hoppe et al., Eur. J. Biochem., 225. 1069-77 (1994); Barford, D., et al, J. Molec. Biol, 239:726-730 (1994); Chernoff et al. , Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 57:2735-2739 (1990); Charbonneau et al. Proc Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, ⁇ °6 ' ;5252-5256 (1989).
  • the primers had the following respective sequences:
  • the first primer which hybridizes to the non-coding strand, corresponds to the 5' portion of the PTP-IB coding sequence and encodes a BamH I restriction site upstream of the initiation codon, to facilitate cloning.
  • the second primer which hybridizes to the coding strand, corresponds to the 3' portion of the PTB- IB fragment of interest, and encodes a stop codon and an EcoR I restriction site downstream from the stop codon.
  • a 100 ⁇ l PCR reaction mixture containing approx. 1 ug of the human placental cDNA library, 0.2 mM of each dNTP, 30 uM of each primer, lx Amplitaq DNA polymerase buffer (Perkin-Elmer, Norwalk CT), and 5 units Amplitaq DNA polymerase (Perkin-Elmer) was denatured at 94 ° C for 5 minutes and then subjected to 25 cycles of amplification as follows: 1) 94 ° C denaturation for 1 minute; 2) 55 ° C annealing for 1 minute; and 3) 72 ° C primer extension for 1 minute.
  • the PCR reaction product (992 bp) was digested with BamH I and EcoR I (New England Biolabs, Beverly MA) to yield a 975 bp product encoding the 321 amino acid PTP-IB protein fragment, and having "sticky ends" to facilitate cloning.
  • B Production of a PTP-IB expression vector.
  • the 975 bp PTP-IB partial cDNA was purified by agarose gel electrophoresis and ligated into a BamH HEcoR I-digested pGEX-3X plasmid vector (Pharmacia, Piscataway, NJ).
  • the pGEX vector is designed to produce a fusion of glutathione-S- transferase (GST) to a protein encoded by another DNA fragment inserted into the vector's cloning site.
  • GST glutathione-S- transferase
  • E. coli strain DH5 ⁇ (Gibco-BRL) was transformed with plasmid pGEX-3X-
  • PTP-1B following the supplier's transformation protocol and grown at 37 ° C with vigorous shaking in Luria-Bertani broth supplemented with 100 ug/ml ampicillin.
  • O.D. 600 of 0.7-1 production of the GST/PTP-IB fusion protein was induced with 0.1 mM IPTG (Isopropyl b-D-Thiogalactoside). After 3 additional hours of culturing at 37 C, the bacteria were pelleted by centrifugation.
  • the bacterial pellet was resuspended in lOx (w/v) lysis buffer consisting of 12.5 mM HEPES, 2 mM EDTA, pH 7.0, 15 mM b-mercaptoethanol (bME) and 1 mM PMSF.
  • the lysate was sonicated (on ice) until slight clearing was observed (approx. three min.) and then centrifuged at 10,000 revolutions per minute (RPM) for 10 min.
  • the supernatant was diluted 1 :4 with buffer A (25 mM HEPES, pH 7.0, and 15 mM bME).
  • Fractions containing PTPase activity were pooled, diluted 1 :4 with NET buffer (20 mM Tris, pH 8.8, 100 mM NaCl, 1 mM EDTA and 15 mM bME), and loaded onto a 10 ml GST-Sepharose 4B column (Pharmacia). After loading, the column was washed first with 3 bed volumes of NET buffer + 1%> NP40 (Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, MO), then with NET buffer until O.D. at 280 nm was basal. The GST/PTP-IB fusion protein was eluted from the column using 10 mM glutathione in 33 mM Tris, pH 8.0.
  • the GST/PTP- IB-containing fractions from the GST-Sepharose 4B purification were pooled, concentrated into a final storage buffer (0.2 M NaCl, 25 mM HEPES, 1 mM EDTA, and 5 mM DTT, pH 7.0) using a 1 ml Hi-Trap Q column (pre-packed, Pharmacia), and stored at -80 ° C (final concentration of 0.52 mg/ml).
  • the foregoing procedure yielded approximately 5mg of PTP-IB fusion protein per 500 ml of cultured cells, purified to substantial homogeneity as assessed by SDS- PAGE.
  • the protein concentration of the PTP-IB enzyme preparation was determined using the Bio-Rad Protein Assay kit (Bio-Rad, Hercules CA). An aliquot from each sample was taken and diluted to 2 mg protein/ml using activity assay buffer (100 mM Sodium Acetate, pH 6.0, 1 mM EDTA, 0.1% TX-100 (International Biotechnologies, Inc.) and 15 mM bME) to form a PTP-IB stock solution.
  • activity assay buffer 100 mM Sodium Acetate, pH 6.0, 1 mM EDTA, 0.1% TX-100 (International Biotechnologies, Inc.) and 15 mM bME
  • a 100 ul reaction mixture was prepared containing 10 ul of the PTP-IB stock solution, 10 ul of 9 mM p-nitrophenylphosphate ((pNPP), Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis MO), and 80 ul of activity assay buffer (100 mM sodium acetate, pH 6.0, 1 mM EDTA, 0.1%) Triton X-100, 15 mM bME). Reactions were mixed gently and incubated at 37 ° C for 60 minutes. Enzymatic cleavage of phosphate from pNPP (a tyrosine phosphate analog) is marked by a colorimetric change in this substrate. See, e.g., Imbert et al, Biochem J., 297. 163-173 (1994); Ghosh and Miller, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm., 194:36-44 (1993); Zanke et al, Eur. J. Immunol, 22:235-39 (1992).
  • a human cDNA library was synthesized from RNA isolated from the human Jurkat cell line, as described above for PTP-IB
  • CD45 cDNA was amplified, using polymerase chain reaction (PCR), from the cDNAs synthesized above. Two PCR primers were synthesized to amplify the coding sequence of CD45. The primers had the following respective sequences:
  • CD45 (5') (SEQ ID NO: 3)
  • CD45 (3') (SEQ ID NO: 4)
  • the first primer corresponds to the 5' portion of the CD45 coding sequence and encodes a Sma I restriction site upstream of the initiation codon, to facilitate cloning.
  • the second primer corresponds to the 3' portion of the CD45 sequence, and encodes a stop codon and a Sma I restriction site downstream from the stop codon.
  • the PCR reaction product (2127 bp) was digested with Sma I (New England Biolabs, Beverly MA) to yield a 2110 bp product.
  • the pET24C plasmid vector (Novagen, Inc., Madison WI) was digested with the BamH I restriction enzyme, and the "sticky" ends were filled using T4 DNA polymerase according to the manufacturer's instructions (New England Biolabs, Beverly MA); the resulting plasmid DNA was ligated to Sma /-digested CD45 PCR product.
  • the pET24C vector is designed to produce high levels of the protein encoded by cDNA inserted into the vector's cloning site (CD45), in bacterial hosts. Complete sequencing of the insert of the resultant plasmid, designated pET24C-CD45, confirmed the identity of the CD45 cDNA, and insertion in the proper orientation and reading frame.
  • E. coli strain DH5 (Gibco-BRL) was transformed with pET24C-CD45 following the supplier's transformation protocol, plated onto Luria-Bertani agar plates supplemented with 30 ug/ml kanamycin and grown overnight at 37 ° C. A single bacterial colony was transferred into 50 mis Luria-Bertani broth supplemented with 30 ug/ml kanamycin and grown overnight with vigorous shaking. This overnight culture was split into two equal parts, and added to 2L Luria-Bertani broth supplemented with 50 ug/ml kanamycin. When the cultures reached an O.D.
  • the bacterial pellet (approximately 5 grams) was resuspended in lOx (w/v) lysis buffer consisting of 12.5 mM HEPES, 2 mM EDTA, pH 7.0, 15 mM bME and 1 mM PMSF. The lysate was sonicated (on ice) until slight clearing was observed (approx. three min.) and then centrifuged at 10,000 revolutions per minute (RPM) for 10 min. The supernatant was filtered through 1mm Wattman filter paper, and 9.7 grams (i.e., 194 grams/L) of ammonium sulfate were added to the solution on ice to precipitate soluble proteins.
  • lOx (w/v) lysis buffer consisting of 12.5 mM HEPES, 2 mM EDTA, pH 7.0, 15 mM bME and 1 mM PMSF.
  • the lysate was sonicated (on ice) until slight clearing was observed (approx
  • the lysate was spun at 10,000 RPM for 30 min. at 4 C; supernatant was removed, and an additional 7.6 grams (i.e., 151 grams/L) of ammonium sulfate were added.
  • the resulting pellet was resuspended in 3 mis of buffer B (33 mM imidazole-HCl pH 8.0, 2mM EDTA, 10 mM bME, 0.002% PMSF) and stored on ice.
  • the spin supernatant with ammonium sulfate was spun again at 10,000 RPM for 30 mins at 4 C.
  • the resulting pellet from the second centrifugation was resuspended in 2 mis of buffer B.
  • the two pellet solutions were pooled and dialyzed overnight against buffer B.
  • the CD45-containing fractions from the MonoQ column purification were pooled and stored at 4 C.
  • CD45 enzymatic activity of samples was assayed in microtiter plates as follows.
  • a 100 ul reaction mixture was prepared containing 10 ul of the CD45 stock solution, 10 ul of 9.3 mM p-nitrophenylphosphate ((pNPP), Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis MO), and 80 ul of activity assay buffer (100 mM sodium acetate, pH 6.0, 1 mM EDTA, 0.1%) Triton X-100, 15 mM bME). Reactions were mixed gently and incubated at 37 ° C for 60 minutes. Reactions were stopped by addition of 10 ul of a 0.5 M NaOH/50% EtOH solution. To determine the enzymatic activity, absorbance readings of the reactions were measured at 405 nm using a Molecular Devices Thermomax Plate Reader (Menlo Park CA). In vitro PTPase Inhibition Assay
  • the ability of the compounds of the present invention, such as the cinnamic acid derivative compounds of Example 2, to inhibit the PTPase activity of PTP-IB, CD45, PTP-IC, and PTP ⁇ was determined using modifications of the PTP-IB and CD45 activity assays described in Examples 3 and 4.
  • 0.001 mmol of the cinnamic acid derivative (or other PTPase inhibitor compound) was dissolved in 100 ul of DMSO to create a 10 mM stock solution.
  • the 10 mM stock solution was used to add varying concentrations (100 uM, 33 uM, 10 uM, 3 uM, 1 uM, 0.3 uM, 0.1 uM, 0.03 uM, 0.01 uM or 0.003 uM) of the inhibitor compound to a series of otherwise identical PTPase activity assay reactions (100 ul final volume in microtiter wells).
  • each 100 ul reaction contained 10 ul PTPase enzyme stock solution (final phosphatase concentration of approximately 20 ng/well), 70 ul activity assay buffer, 10 ul pNPP stock solution (final pNPP concentration of .9 mM for PTP-IB assay, 0.93 mM for CD45 assay, 0.5 mM for PTP ⁇ assay, and 8 mM for PTP-IC assay), and 10 ul of the diluted inhibitor compound in DMSO.
  • Assay buffers contained: for CD45 and PTP-IB assays, 100 mM sodium acetate at pH 6.0, 1 mM EDTA, 0.1% Triton X-100, and 15 mM bME; for PTP-IC assays, 100 mM sodium acetate at pH 5.5, 0.1% BSA, and 15 mM bME; for PTP ⁇ assays, 100 mM sodium acetate at pH 5.25, 0.1 % BSA, and 15 mM bME. Purified phosphatase was added to the reaction mixtures to begin the reactions; the reactions were incubated at 37C for 60 min. (for PTP-IB and CD45 assays) or at 27 C for 60 min.
  • the concentration of inhibitor compound required to inhibit 50%> of the PTPase activity was determined as follows. First, absorbance readings from the negative control reactions were treated as a baseline and subtracted from the absorbance readings of the experimental reactions. Then, for each reaction, a percent inhibition was calculated using the following formula:
  • IC50 concentration was calculated from a best-fit computer analysis of the calculated percent inhibition for the various dilutions of the compound.
  • Inhibitor compounds having an IC50 less than 10 uM (and optimally less than 5uM) for a particular PTPase were scored as highly effective inhibitors of that PTPase enzyme, and are preferred inhibitors of the present invention.
  • the compounds of the present invention have asymmetric centers and may occur as racemates, racemic mixtures, and as individual enantiomers or diastereoisomers, with all isomeric forms being included in the present invention as well as mixtures thereof.
  • compositions of Formula (Al) thru (Al l) where a basic or acidic group is present in the structure are also included within the scope of this invention.
  • an acidic substituent such as - COOH 5 there can be formed the ammonium, sodium, potassium, calcium salt, and the like, for use as the dosage form.
  • a basic group such as amino or a basic heteroaryl radical, such as pyridyl
  • an acidic salt such as hydrochloride, hydrobromide, acetate, maleate, pamoate, methanesulfonate, p-toluenesulfonate, and the like, can be used as the dosage form.
  • esters can be employed, e.g., methyl, tert-butyl, pivaloyloxymethyl, and the like, and those esters known in the art for modifying solubility or hydrolysis characteristics for use as sustained release or prodrug formulations.
  • solvates may form solvates with water or common organic solvents. Such solvates are encompassed within the scope of the invention.
  • terapéuticaally effective amount shall mean that amount of drug or pharmaceutical agent that will elicit the biological or medical response of a tissue, system, animal, or human that is being sought by a researcher, veterinarian, medical doctor or other clinician.
  • a daily dose of about 0.5mg/Kg to lOOmg/Kg body weight in divided doses is suggested to treat PTPase related diseases. Such dosage has to be individualized by the clinician.
  • the present invention also has the objective of providing suitable topical, oral, and parenteral pharmaceutical formulations for use in the novel methods of treatment of the present invention.
  • the compounds of the present invention may be administered orally as tablets, aqueous or oily suspensions, lozenges, troches, powders, granules, emulsions, capsules, syrups or elixirs.
  • the composition for oral use may contain one or more agents selected from the group of sweetening agents, flavouring agents, colouring agents and preserving agents in order to produce pharmaceutically elegant and palatable preparations.
  • the tablets contain the acting ingredient in admixture with non-toxic pharmaceutically acceptable excipients which are suitable for the manufacture of tablets.
  • excipients may be, for example, (1) inert diluents , such as calcium carbonate, lactose, calcium phosphate or sodium phosphate; (2) granulating and disintegrating agents, such as corn starch or alginic acid; (3) binding agents, such as starch, gelatin or acacia; and (4) lubricating agents, such as magnesium stearate, stearic acid or talc.
  • inert diluents such as calcium carbonate, lactose, calcium phosphate or sodium phosphate
  • granulating and disintegrating agents such as corn starch or alginic acid
  • binding agents such as starch, gelatin or acacia
  • lubricating agents such as magnesium stearate, stearic acid or talc.
  • These tablets may be uncoated or coated by known techniques to delay disintegration and absorption in the gastrointestinal tract and thereby provide a sustained action over a longer period.
  • a time delay material such as g
  • Formulations for oral use may be in the form of hard gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with an inert solid diluent, for example, calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate or kaolin. They may also be in the form of soft gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with water or an oil medium, such as peanut oil, liquid paraffin or olive oil.
  • an inert solid diluent for example, calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate or kaolin.
  • the active ingredient is mixed with water or an oil medium, such as peanut oil, liquid paraffin or olive oil.
  • Aqueous suspensions normally contain the active materials in admixture with excipients suitable for the manufacture of aqueous suspension.
  • expicients may be: (1) suspending agent such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, methyl cellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, sodium alginate, polyvinylpyrrolidone, gum tragacanth and gum acacia;
  • dispersing or wetting agents which may be (a) naturally occurring phosphatide such as lecithin; (b) a condensation product of an alkylene oxide with a fatty acid, for example, polyoxyethylene stearate; (c) a condensation product of ethylene oxide with a long chain aliphatic alcohol, for example, heptadecaethylenoxycetanol; (d) a condensation product of ethylene oxide with a partial ester derived from a fatty acid and hexitol such as polyoxyethylene sorbitol monooleate, or (e) a condensation product of ethylene oxide with a partial ester derived from fatty acids and hexitol anhydrides, for example polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate.
  • phosphatide such as lecithin
  • a condensation product of an alkylene oxide with a fatty acid for example, polyoxyethylene stearate
  • a condensation product of ethylene oxide with a long chain aliphatic alcohol for
  • the pharmaceutical compositions may be in the form of a sterile injectable aqueous or oleagenous suspension.
  • This suspension may be formulated according to known methods using those suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents which have been mentioned above.
  • the sterile injectable preparation may also a sterile injectable solution or suspension in a non-toxic parenterally-acceptable diluent or solvent, for example, as a solution in 1,3-butanediol.
  • the acceptable vehicles and solvents that may be employed are water, Ringer's solution, and isotonic sodium chloride solution.
  • sterile, fixed oils are conventionally employed as a solvent or suspending medium.
  • any bland fixed oil may be employed including synthetic mono- or diglycerides.
  • fatty acids such as oleic acid find use in the preparation of injectables.
  • Compounds of Formula (Al) thru (Al 1) may also be administered in the form of suppositories for rectal administration of the drug.
  • These compositions can be prepared by mixing the drug with a suitable non-irritating excipient which is solid at ordinary temperature but liquid at the rectal temperature and will therefore melt in the rectum to release the drug.
  • suitable non-irritating excipient which is solid at ordinary temperature but liquid at the rectal temperature and will therefore melt in the rectum to release the drug.
  • Such materials are cocoa butter and polyethylene glycols.
  • the compounds of the present invention may also be administered in the form of liposome delivery systems, such as small unilamellar vesicles, large unilamellar vesicles, and multilamellar vesicles.
  • Liposomes can be formed from a variety of phospholipids, such as cholesterol, stearylamine, or phosphatidylcholines.

Landscapes

  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Acyclic And Carbocyclic Compounds In Medicinal Compositions (AREA)
  • Investigating, Analyzing Materials By Fluorescence Or Luminescence (AREA)
  • Plural Heterocyclic Compounds (AREA)
  • Nitrogen Condensed Heterocyclic Rings (AREA)
  • Organic Low-Molecular-Weight Compounds And Preparation Thereof (AREA)
  • Thiazole And Isothizaole Compounds (AREA)
  • Heterocyclic Carbon Compounds Containing A Hetero Ring Having Nitrogen And Oxygen As The Only Ring Hetero Atoms (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention relates to novel protein tyrosine phosphatase modulating compounds having the general structure shown in Formula (A1) Y-X-C(R')=C(R')COOR''', to methods for their preparation, to compositions comprising the compounds, to their use for treatment of human and animal disorders, to their use for purification of proteins or glycoproteins, and to their use in diagnosis. The invention relates to modulation of the activity of molecules with phosphotyrosine recognition units, including protein tyrosine phosphatases (PTPases) and proteins with Src-homology-2 domains, in in vitro systems, microorganisms, eukaryotic cells, whole animals and human beings. R' and R'' are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, alkyl, arylalkyl. R''' is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl. X is aryl. Y is selected from hydrogen or α wherein (*) indicates a potential point of attachment to X.

Description

Modulators of Proteins with Phosphotyrosine Recognition Units
Field of the Invention
The present invention relates to novel protein tyrosine phosphatase modulating compounds, to methods for their preparation, to compositions comprising the compounds, to their use for treatment of human and animal disorders, to their use for purification of proteins or glycoproteins, and to their use in diagnosis. The invention relates to modulation of the activity of molecules with phosphotyrosine recognition units, including protein tyrosine phosphatases (PTPases) and proteins with Src- homology-2 domains, in in vitro systems, microorganisms, eukaryoic cells, whole animals and human beings.
Background of the Invention
Reversible phosphorylation of proteins is a prevalent biological mechanism for modulation of enzymatic activity in living organisms. Tonks et al., J. Biol. Chem., 263(14):6722-3 (1988). Such reversible phosphorylation requires both a protein kinase (PK), to phosphorylate a protein at a particular amino acid residue, and a protein phosphatase (PP), to remove the phosphate moieties. See generally, Hunter,
Cell, 50:225-236 (1995). Recently, it has been estimated that humans have as many as 2000 conventional PK genes, and as many as 1000 PP genes. Id.
One major class of PK's/PP's - the protein serine/threonine kinases and protein serine/threonine phosphatases - have been shown to play critical roles in the regulation of metabolism. See generally, Cohen, Trends Biochem. Sci., 77:408-413
(1992); Shenolikar, Ann. Rev. Cell Biol, 70:55-86 (1994); Bollen et al, Crit. Rev. Biochem. Mol. Biol., 27:227-81 (1992). As their name suggests, these enzymes phosphorylate and dephoshphorylate serine or threonine residues of substrate proteins. Inhibitors of protein serine/threonine phosphatases and kinases have been described. See, e.g., MacKintosh and MacKintosh, TIBS, 19:4A4-44% (1994).
The protein tyrosine kinases/phosphatases comprise a second, distinct family of PK/PP enzymes of significant interest, and have been implicated in the control of normal and neoplastic cell growth and proliferation. See Fisher et al., Science,
255:401-406 (1991). Protein tyrosine kinase (PTK) genes are ancient in evolutionary origin and share a high degree of inter-species conservation. See generally Hunter and Cooper, Ann. Rev. Biochem., 54:897-930 (1985). PTK enzymes exhibit high specificity for tyrosine, and ordinarily do not phosphorylate serine, threonine, or hydroxyproline.
More than 75 members of the PTPase family have been identified in eukaryotes, prokaryotes, and even viruses. Tonks and Neel, Cell 57:365-368. Protein tyrosine phosphatases (PTPases) were originally identified and purified from cell and tissue lysates using a variety of artificial substrates, and therefore their natural functions and substrates were not obvious. However, their roles in cellular processes, including cell-cell contact and cell adhesion, and growth factor and antigen signaling events, have begun to be elucidated.
PTPases are generally grouped into two categories: those which have both an extracellular domain and an intracellular catalytic domain, the receptor PTPases (R- PTPases); and those which are entirely intracellular. For R-PTPases much effort has been directed at determining the function of the extracellular domain. Most of the R- PTPases contain extracellular domains which are structurally similar to domains found in known adhesion molecules; these domains include fibronectin type III repeats, immunoglobulin domains, and cadherin extracellular repeats. See generally Brady-Kalnay and Tonks, Curr. Opin. Cell. Biol. 7:650-657 (1995); Streuli, Curr.
Opin. Cell. Biol. 5:182-188 (1996). This homology with proteins known to be involved in adhesion suggested a role for these R-PTPases in regulating or mediating adhesion events. For several of the R-PTPases, this has now been demonstrated. Cells form specialized structures at the sites of cell-cell contact (adherens junctions) and cell-extracellular matrix contact (focal adhesion). Multiple signal transduction molecules are recruited to these sites, including several PTK's; and these sites are characterized by increased protein tyrosine phosphorylation. These sites are impermanent, and are created and destroyed as required for cell mobility. As enhanced tyrosine phosphorylation is characteristic of the formation of adherens junctions and focal adhesions, it is likely that protein tyrosine dephosphorylation by PTPases serves to regulate the creation and destruction of the sites. Supporting this, several studies have shown that treatment with a general PTPase inhibitor (vanadate) resulted in increased focal adhesion formation and increased cell spreading. Volberg et al, The EMBO J. 77:1733-1742 (1992); Bennett et al, J. Cell Sci. 705:891-901 (1993). Importantly, the broadly-expressed LAR R-PTPase has been demonstrated to localize to focal adhesions, apparently via the LAR-interacting protein LIP.1. Serra- Pages et al, The EMBO J. 74:2827-2838 (1995). As PTPδ and PTPσ, both R- PTPases, also associate with LIP.l [Pulido et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 92:11686-
11690 (1995)], it is likely that these two phosphatases can also localize to focal adhesions. Most significantly, LAR only localized to the portion of the focal adhesion which is proximal to the nucleus, and is thought to be undergoing disassembly. Thus it is likely that these phosphatases act to negatively regulate focal adhesion formation, acting to enhance the destruction of the focal adhesion site.
R-PTPases may also act to positively regulate adhesion. Adherens junctions contain, among others, adhesion receptors termed cadherins which mediate cell-cell contact through homophilic binding; the cadherins associate with α-, β-, and γ- catenins, intracellular proteins which interact with cortical actin. Association between cadherins and catenins serves to stabilize the adherens junction and to strengthen cell- cell contact. See generally Cowin, Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. 97: 10759-10761 (1994). Association of cadherin with β-catenin is decreased by tyrosine phosphorylation of β- catenin [Kinch et al, J. Cell. Biol. 730:461-471 (1995); Behrens et al, J. Cell. Biol. 720:757-766 (1993)]; moreover, treatment with the PTPase inhibitor vanadate inhibits cadherin-dependent adhesion [Matsuyoshi et al, J. Cell. Biol. 775:703-714 (1992)]. Collectively, these data indicate that PTPase activity is critical in maintaining cadherin-mediated cell aggregation. The R-PTPases PTPμ and PTPK associate intracellularly with cadherins, and colocalize with cadherins and catenins to adherens junctions [Brady-Kalnay et al, J. Cell. Biol. 730:977-986 (1995); Fuchs et al, J. Biol. Chem. 277:16712-16719 (1996)]; thus PTPμ and PTPK are likely to enhance cadherin function by limiting catenin phosphorylation.
In addition to their catalytic function in regulating adhesion events, several R- PTPases have direct roles in mediating adhesion through their extracellular domains. PTPK and PTPμ mediate cellular aggregation through homophilic binding [Brady-
Kalnay et al, J. Cell. Biol. 722:961-972 (1993); Gebbink et al, J. Biol. Chem. 2(55:16101-16104 (1993); Sap et al, Mol. Cell. Biol. 14:1-9 (1994)]. The neuronal PTPζ (which has also been called R-PTPβ) binds to contactin, a neuronal cell recognition molecule; binding of PTPζ to contactin increases cell adhesion and neurite outgrowth. Peles et al, Cell 52:251-260 (1995). A secreted splice variant of
PTPζ (also known as phosphacan) binds the extracellular matrix protein tenascin [Barnea et al. J. Biol. Chem. 269: 14349-14352 (1994)], and the neural cell adhesion molecules N-CAM and Ng-CAM [Maurel et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 97:2512-2516 (1994)]. As the expression of PTPζ is restricted to radial glial cells in the developing central nervous system, which are though to form barriers to neuronal migration during embryogenesis, it is likely that the interaction of PTPζ with contactin, tenascin, N-CAM, and/or Ng-CAM acts to regulate neuronal migration. This has been demonstrated for a related R-PTPase, DLAR, in Drosophila [Krueger et al. Cell 84:6\ 1-622 (1996)].
Because tyrosine phosphorylation by PTK enzymes usually is associated with cell proliferation, cell transformation and cell differentiation, it was assumed that PTPases were also associated with these events. For several of the intracellular PTPases, this function has now been verified. SHPl (which has also been called SHPTP1, SHP, HCP, and PTP-1C [see Adachi et al, Cell 55:15 (1996)]), an intracellular PTPase which contains two amino- terminal phosphotyrosyl binding Src Homology 2 (SH2) domains followed by the catalytic PTPase domain, has been demonstrated to be an important negative regulator of growth factor signaling events. See generally Tonks and Neel, supra; Streuli, supra. In mice, loss of SHPl function (the motheaten and viable motheaten phenotypes) causes multiple hematopoietic defects resulting in immunodeficiency and severe autoimmunity; culminating in lethality by 2-3 weeks or 2-3 months depending on the severity of SHPl deficiency. Although these mice have reduced numbers of hematopoietic cells, suggesting defects in development and maturation, those cells which survive and enter the periphery are characterized by hyper-responsiveness to growth factors and antigen. This observation suggested a role for SHPl in negative regulation of hematopoietic signaling events.
This has now been well-established for the erythropoietin receptor (EpoR), a member of the cytokine receptor family (which also includes the receptors for interleukins 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7; granulocyte-macrophage colony stimulating factor, and macrophage colony stimulating factor). SHPl associates via its SH2 domains with tyrosine-phosphorylated EpoR, causing dephosphorylation and inactivation of the EpoR-associated Janus kinase 2 and termination of the cellular response to erythropoietin. Klingmuller et al, Cell 50:729-738 (1995). Mutation of the tyrosine on the EpoR to which SHPl binds results in enhanced cell proliferation to erythropoietin in vitro [Klingmuller, supra]. In humans, mutation of the EpoR resulting in loss of association with SHPl causes autosomal dominant benign erythrocytosis, which is characterized by increased numbers of erythrocytes in the periphery and increased hematocrit. de la Chapelle et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.
90:4495-4499 (1993).
SHPl also appears to be a negative regulator of the cellular response to colony stimulating factor- 1 (CSF-1, a major macrophage mitogenic cytokine), as cells from viable motheaten and motheaten mice, which have reduced or absent SHPl function, are hyper-responsive to CSF-1 in vitro. Reduced SHPl expression also results in increased cellular response to interleukin 3 [Yi et al, Mol. Cell. Biol. 75:7577-7586 (1993)]. Collectively, these observations suggest that SHPl functions to limit the cellular response to cytokines and growth factors by reversing the tyrosine phosphorylation of key signaling intermediates in these pathways.
PTPases appear to play a homologous role in the insulin signaling pathway. Treatment of adipocytes with the PTPase inhibitor vanadate results in increased tyrosine phosphorylation and tyrosine kinase activity of the insulin receptor (InsR), and enhances or mimics the cellular effects of insulin including increased glucose transport. See, e.g., Shisheva and Shechter, Endocrinology 735:1562-1568 (1993);
Fantus, et al, Biochemistry 25:8864-8871 (1989); Kadota, et al, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm. 747:259-266 (1987); Kadota, et al, J. Biol. Chem. 252:8252-8256 (1987). Transiently induced reduction in expression of two PTPases, the intracellular PTPase PTP-IB and the R-PTPase LAR, resulted in similar increases in the cellular response to insulin. Kulas, et al, J. Biol. Chem. 270:2435-2438 (1995); Ahmad et al,
J. Biol. Chem. 270:20503-20508 (1995). Conversely, increased cellular expression of several PTPases (PTPα, PTPε, CD45) in vitro has been demonstrated to result in diminished InsR signaling [see, e.g., Moller, et al, J. Biol. Chem. 277:23126-23131 (1995); Kulas et al, J. Biol Chem. 277:755-760 (1996)]. Finally, increased expression of LAR was observed in adipose tissue from obese human subjects
[Ahmad, et al., j. Clin. Invest. 95:2806-2812 (1995)]. These data provide clear evidence that PTPases negatively regulate the insulin signaling pathway.
While many of the PTPases function to negatively regulate cellular metabolism and response, it is becoming increasingly evident that PTPases provide important positive signaling mechanisms as well. Perhaps the best example of such a positive regulator is the hematopoietic R-PTPase CD45. See generally Streuli, supra; Okumura and Thomas, supra; Trowbridge, Annu. Rev. Immunol. 72:85-116 (1994). CD45 is abundantly expressed on the cell surface of all nucleated hematopoietic cells, in several alternative splice variants. T and B lymphocytes which lack CD45 expression are incapable of responding normally to antigen, suggesting that CD45 is required for antigen receptor signaling. Genetically engineered mice which lack expression of CD45 exhibit severe defects in T lymphocyte development and maturation, indicating an additional role for CD45 in thymopoiesis. The major substrates for CD45 appear to be members of the Src family of PTK's, particularly
Lck and Fyn, whose kinase activity is both positively and negatively regulated by tyrosine phosphorylation. Lck and Fyn isolated from CD45-deficient cells are hyperphosphorylated on negative regulatory tyrosine residues, and their PTK activity is reduced. As CD45 can dephosphorylate and activate purified Lck and Fyn in vitro, these data suggest that CD45 maintains the activity of Lck and Fyn in vivo through dephosphorylation of these negative regulatory tyrosines and that this is an important mechanism for maintaining lymphocyte homeostasis.
A second PTPase which is now believed to play an important positive role in signal transduction is the intracellular, SH2 -domain-containing SHP2 (which has also been called SHPTP-2, SHPTP-3, syp, PTP2c, and PTP-1D [Adachi, et al., supra}).
See generally Saltiel, ^4/M. J. Physiol. 270:E375-385 (1996); Draznin, Endocrinology 757:2647-2648. SHP2 associates, via its SH2 domains, with the receptor for platelet- derived growth factor (PDGF-R), the receptor for epidermal growth factor (EGF-R), with the insulin receptor, and with the predominant substrate of the InsR, insulin receptor substrate 1 (IRS1). Bennett, et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 97:7335-7339
(1994); Case, et al, J. Biol. Chem. 269: 10467- 10474 (1994); Kharitonenkov, et al, J. Biol. Chem. 270:29189-29193 (1995); Kuhne, et al, J. Biol. Chem. 268:11479-11481 (1993). SHP2 PTPase activity is required for cellular response to EGF and insulin, as competitive expression of inactive forms of SHP2 results in diminished signaling events and reduced cellular responses to EGF and insulin. Milarski and Saltiel, J.
Biol. Chem. 259:21239-21243 (1994); Xiao et al, J. Biol. Chem. 259:21244-21248 (1994); Yamauchi et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 92:664-668 (1995). The relevant substrate(s) for the PTPase domain of SHP2 is not known. Due to the fundamental role that PTPases play in normal and neoplastic cellular growth and proliferation, a need exists in the art for agents capable of modulating PTPase activity. On a fundamental level, such agents are useful for elucidating the precise role of protein tyrosine phosphatases and kinases in cellular signalling pathways and cellular growth and proliferation. See generally MacKintosh and MacKintosh, TIBS, 79:444-448 (1994).
More importantly, modulation of PTPase activity has important clinical significance. For example, PTP-IB overexpression has been correlated with breast and ovarian cancers [Weiner et al., J. Natl. Cancer Inst., 55:372-8 (1994); Weiner et al., Am J. Obstet. Gynecol, 770:1177-883 (1994)], and thus agents which modulate
PTP-IB activity would be helpful in elucidating the role of PTP-IB in these conditions and for the development of effective therapeutics against these disease states. The important role of CD45 in hematopoietic development and T lymphocyte function likewise indicates a therapeutic utility for PTPase inhibitors in conditions that are associated with autoimmune disease, and as a prophylaxis for transplant rejection. The antibiotic suramin, which also appears to possess anti-neoplastic indications, has recently been shown to be a potent, irreversible, non-competitive inhibitor of CD45. See Ghosh and Miller, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm. 194:36-44 (1993). The negative regulatory effects of several PTPases on signaling through receptors for growth factors and cytokines, which are implicated in normal cell processing as well as disease states such as cancer and atherosclerosis, also indicate a therapeutic potential for PTPase inhibitors in diseases of hematopoietic origin.
The PTPase Yop2b is an essential virulence determinant in the pathogenic bacterium Yersinia, responsible for bubonic plague. Bliska et al, Proc. Natl. Acad Sci. USA, 55:1187-91 (1991), and thus an antimicrobial indication exists for PTPase inhibitor compounds, as well.
PTPases have been implicated in diabetic conditions. Experiments with one family of PTPase inhibitors, vanadium derivatives, indicate a therapeutic utility for such compounds as oral adjuvants or as alternatives to insulin for the treatment of hyperglycemia. See Posner et al, J. Biol. Chem., 259:4596-4604 (1994). However, such metal-containing PTPase inhibitors act in a fairly non-specific fashion and act with similar potencies against all PTPase enzymes.
In addition to vanadium derivatives, certain organic phosphotyrosine mimetics are reportedly capable of competitively inhibiting PTPase molecules when such mimetics are incorporated into polypeptide artificial PTPase substrates of 6-11 amino acid residues. For example, a "natural" (phosphorylated tyrosine) PTPase substrate, which may be depicted by the Formula:
Figure imgf000011_0001
has been mimicked by eleven-mer oligopeptides containing phosphonomethyl phenylalanine (Pmp), as depicted by the schematic Formula:
Figure imgf000011_0002
See Chatterjee et al, "Phosphopeptide substrates and phosphonopeptide inhibitors of protein tyrosine phosphatases," in Peptides: Chemistry and Biology (Rivier and Smith, Eds.), 1992, Escom Science Publishers: Leiden, Netherlands, pp. 553-55; Burke et al, Biochemistry, 55:6490-94 (1994). More recently, Burke et al., Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm. 204(1) .T 29- 134 (1994) reported that a particular hexameric peptide sequence comprising a Pmp moiety or, more preferably, a phosphonodifluoromethyl phenylalanine (F2Pmp) moiety, as depicted by the schematic Formula:
Figure imgf000012_0001
competitively inhibited PTP-IB. However, such hexapeptide inhibitors nonetheless possess drawbacks for PTPase modulation in vivo. More particularly, the hexapeptide inhibitors described by Burke et al. are sufficiently large and anionic to potentially inhibit efficient migration across cell membranes, for interaction with the catalytic domains of transmembrane and intracellular PTPase enzymes which lie within a cell membrane. A need exists for small, organic-molecule based PTPase inhibitors having fewer anionic moieties, to facilitate migration across cell membranes.
For all of the foregoing reasons, a need exists in the art for novel compounds effective for modulating, and especially inhibiting, the phosphatase activity of protein tyrosine phosphatase molecules.
Summary of the Invention
The invention provides compounds and derivatives thereof useful for modulating, and especially inhibiting, the phosphatase activity of one or more protein tyrosine phosphatase (PTPase) and/or dual specificity phosphatase enzymes. In one aspect, the present invention relates to compounds having the general structure shown in Formula (Al): Y-X-C(R')=C(R")C00R" (Al) wherein R , R , R , X and Y are defined below. The inventions further provides salts, esters, prodrugs, solvates, and the like of the compounds, and compositions comprising these compounds.
Definitions
In the specification and claims, the term "derivatives" means: aryl acrylic acids with structure depicted in Formula (Al) having substitution (with, e.g., hydrogen, hydroxy, halo, amino, carboxy, nitro, cyano, methoxy, etc.) at one or more atoms of the aryl ring. Moreover, "derivatives" includes compounds of the Formula
(Al) having substitution at the alkene carbons with, e.g., an electron withdrawing group (e.g., Cl, F, Br, CF3, phenyl) or an electron donating group (e.g., CH3, alkoxy).
Y-X-C(R>C(R")COOR"
(Al)
As used herein, the term "attached" signifies a stable covalent bond, certain preferred points of attachment being apparent to those skilled in the art.
The terms "halogen" or "halo" include fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine.
The term "alkyl" includes Ci-Cπ straight chain saturated and C2-C π unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbon groups, C[-Cn branched saturated and C2-Cπ unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbon groups, C -C8 cyclic saturated and C5-C8 unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbon groups, and C]-Cn straight chain or branched saturated and C2-Cπ straight chain or branched unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbon groups substituted with C3-C8 cyclic saturated and unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbon groups having the specified number of carbon atoms. For example, this definition shall include but is not limited to methyl (Me), ethyl (Et), propyl (Pr), butyl (Bu), pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, undecyl, ethenyl, propenyl, butenyl, penentyl, hexenyl, heptenyl, octenyl, nonenyl, decenyl, undecenyl, isopropyl (i-Pr), isobutyl (i-Bu), tert-butyl (t-Bu), sec-butyl (s-Bu), isopentyl, neopentyl, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, cyclooctyl, cyclopentenyl, cyclohexenyl, cycloheptenyl, cyclooctenyl, methylcyclopropyl, ethylcyclohexenyl, butenylcyclopentyl, and the like.
The term "substituted alkyl" represents an alkyl group as defined above wherein the substitutents are independently selected from halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, carbamoyl, C0-πalkyloxy, arylC0-nalkyloxy, C0 -nalkylthio, arylC0- iialkylthio, C0-nalkylamino, arylC0-nalkylamino, di(arylC0-πalkyl)amino, . πalkylcarbonyl, arylC^nalkylcarbonyl, C πalkylcarboxy, arylCi-nalkylcarboxy, Cι_ nalkylcarbonylamino, aryl Cι-πalkylcarbonylamino, tetrahydrofuryl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl, hydroxypyronyl, -C0-nalkylCOORι, -Co-ualkylCONR R3 wherein R1} R2 and R3 are independently selected from hydrogen, CrCn alkyl, arylC0-Cualkyl, or R2 and R3 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one Cj-Cn alkyl, arylC0-
Cπalkyl substituent.
The term "alkyloxy" (e.g. methoxy, ethoxy, propyloxy, allyloxy, cyclohexyloxy) represents an alkyl group as defined above having the indicated number of carbon atoms attached through an oxygen bridge. The term "alkyloxyalkyl" represents an alkyloxy group attached through an alkyl group as defined above having the indicated number of carbon atoms.
The term "alkylthio" (e.g. methylthio, ethylthio, propylthio, cyclohexenylthio and the like) represents an alkyl group as defined above having the indicated number of carbon atoms attached through a sulfur bridge. The term "alkylthioalkyl" represents an alkylthio group attached through an alkyl group as defined above having the indicated number of carbon atoms.
The term "alkylamino" (e.g. methylamino, diethylamino, butylamino, N- propyl-N-hexylamino, (2-cyclopentyl)propylamino, hexenylamino, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl and the like) represents one or two alkyl groups as defined above having the indicated number of carbon atoms attached through an amine bridge. The two alkyl groups maybe taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 11 carbon atoms with at least one C Cnalkyl, arylCo-Cπ alkyl substituent. The term "alkylaminoalkyl" represents an alkylamino group attached through an alkyl group as defined above having the indicated number of carbon atoms.
The term "alkylcarbonyl" (e.g. cyclooctylcarbonyl, pentylcarbonyl, 3- hexenylcarbonyl) represents an alkyl group as defined above having the indicated number of carbon atoms attached through a carbonyl group. The term "alkylcarbonylalkyl" represents an alkylcarbonyl group attached through an alkyl group as defined above having the indicated number of carbon atoms.
The term "alkylcarboxy" (e.g. heptylcarboxy, cyclopropylcarboxy, 3- pentenylcarboxy) represents an alkylcarbonyl group as defined above wherein the carbonyl is in turn attached through an oxygen. The term "alkylcarboxy alkyl" represents an alkylcarboxy group attached through an alkyl group as defined above having the indicated number of carbon atoms.
The term "alkylcarbonylamino" (e.g. hexylcarbonylamino, cyclopentylcarbonyl-aminomethyl, methylcarbonylaminophenyl) represents an alkylcarbonyl group as defined above wherein the carbonyl is in turn attached through the nitrogen atom of an amino group. The nitrogen group may itself be substituted with an alkyl or aryl group. The term "alkylcarbonylaminoalkyl" represents an alkylcarbonylamino group attached through an alkyl group as defined above having the indicated number of carbon atoms. The nitrogen group may itself be substituted with an alkyl or aryl group. The term "aryl" represents an unsubstituted, mono-, di- or trisubstituted monocyclic, polycyclic, biaryl and heterocyclic aromatic groups covalently attached at any ring position capable of forming a stable covalent bond, certain preferred points of attachment being apparent to those skilled in the art (e.g., 3-indolyl, 4- imidazolyl). The aryl substituents are independently selected from the group consisting of halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl, hydroxypyronyl, Cj.π alkyl, arylC|. iialkyl, C0-ιιalkyloxyC0-ιι alkyl, arylC0-ιιalkyloxyC0-ιι alkyl, C0-ιιalkylthioC0-ιιalkyl, arylC0-ι ιalkylthioCo-1 ιalkyl, C0-1 ιalkylaminoC0-ι l^lkyl, arylC0-π alky laminoC0- 11 alkyl, d^arylC^πalky^aminoCo-nalky 1 , Ci_nalkylcarbonylCo.il alkyl, a ry ICj. nalkylcarbonylCo.ii alkyl, Ci.nalkylcarboxyCo-iialkyl, arylC^nalkylcarboxyCo. nalkyl, Ci.nalkylcarbonylaminoCo.ii alkyl, arylCi.nalkylcarbonylaminoCo.ii alkyl, - C0.πalkylCOOR4, -C0.ιιalkylCONR5R6 wherein ^, R5 and R^ are independently selected from hydrogen, C Cn alkyl, arylC0-Cn alkyl, or R5 and R^ are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one CpCj j alkyl, arylC0-Cι j alkyl substituent.
The definition of aryl includes but is not limited to phenyl, biphenyl, naphthyl, dihydronaphthyl, tetrahydronaphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, azulenyl, anthryl, phenanthryl, fluorenyl, pyrenyl, thienyl, benzothienyl, isobenzothienyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzothienyl, furyl, pyranyl, benzofuranyl, isobenzofuranyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzofuranyl, pyrrolyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, indolizinyl, indazolyl, imidazolyl, benzimidazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyradazinyl, pyrimidinyl, triazinyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, 4H-quinolizinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, 1,8-naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, carbazolyl, acridinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, phenoxazinyl, chromanyl, benzodioxolyl, piperonyl, purinyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, benzthiazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl.
The term "arylalkyl" (e.g. (4-hydroxyphenyl)ethyl, (2-aminonaphthyl)hexenyl, pyridylcyclopentyl) represents an aryl group as defined above attached through an alkyl group as defined above having the indicated number of carbon atoms. The term "arylcarbonyl" (e.g. 2-thiophenylcarbonyl, 3 - methoxyanthrylcarbonyl, oxazolylcarbonyl) represents an aryl group as defined above attached through a carbonyl group.
The term "arylalkylcarbonyl" (e.g. (2,3-dimethoxyphenyl)propylcarbonyl, (2- chloronaphthyl)pentenylcarbonyl, imidazolylcyclopentylcarbonyl) represents an arylalkyl group as defined above wherein the alkyl group is in turn attached through a carbonyl.
The term "signal transduction" is a collective term used to define all cellular processes that follow the activation of a given cell or tissue. Examples of signal transduction include but are not in any way limited to cellular events that are induced by polypeptide hormones and growth factors (e.g. insulin, insulin-like growth factors I and II, growth hormone, epidermal growth factor, platelet-derived growth factor), cytokines (e.g. interleukines), extracellular matrix components, and cell-cell interactions. Phosphotyrosine recognition units/tyrosine phosphate recognition units/phosphotyrosine recognition units are defined as areas or domains of proteins or glycoproteins that have affinity for molecules containing phosphorylated tyrosine residues (pTyr). Examples of pTyr recognition units include but are not in any way limited to: PTPases, SH2 domains and PTB domains. PTPases are defined as enzymes with the capacity to dephosphorylate pTyr- containing proteins or glycoproteins. Examples of PTPases include but are not in any way limited to: intracellular PTPases (e.g. PTP-IB, TC-PTP, PTP-1C, PTP-1D,PTP- Dl, PTP-D2), receptor-type PTPases (e.g. PTPα, PTPε, PTPβ, PTPγ, CD45, PTPK, PTPμ), dual specificity phosphatases (e.g. VH1, VHR, cdc25) and other PTPases such as LAR, SHP-1, SHP-2, PTP-1H, PTPMEGI, PTP-PEST, PTPζ , PTPS31, IA-2 and
HePTP and the like.
Modulation of cellular processes is defined as the capacity of compounds of the invention to 1) either increase or decrease ongoing, normal or abnormal, signal transduction, 2) initiate normal signal transduction, and 3) initiate abnormal signal transduction.
Modulation of pTyr-mediated signal transduction/modulation of the activity of molecules with pTyr recognition units is defined as the capacity of compounds of the invention to 1) increase or decrease the activity of proteins or glycoproteins with pTyr recognition units (e.g. PTPases, SH2 domains or PTB domains) or to 2) decrease or increase the association of a pTyr-containing molecule with a protein or glycoprotein with pTyr recognition units either via a direct action on the pTyr recognition site or via an indirect mechanism. Examples of modulation of pTyr-mediated signal transduction/modulation of the activity of molecules with pTyr recognition units, which are not intended in any way limiting to the scope of the invention claimed, are: a) inhibition of PTPase activity leading to either increased or decreased signal transduction of ongoing cellular processes; b) inhibition of PTPase activity leading to initiation of normal or abnormal cellular activity; c) stimulation of PTPase activity leading to either increased or decreased signal transduction of ongoing cellular processes; d) stimulation of PTPase activity leading to initiation of normal or abnormal cellular activity; e) inhibition of binding of SH2 domains or PTB domains to proteins or glycoproteins with pTyr leading to increase or decrease of ongoing cellular processes; f) inhibition of binding of SH2 domains or PTB domains to proteins or glycoproteins with pTyr leading to initiation of normal or abnormal cellular activity.
A subject is defined as any mammalian species, including humans.
Detailed Description
This application relates to compounds having the general structure shown in Formula (Al):
Y-X-C(R')=C(R")COOR"' (Al) wherein
(i) R and R are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, alkyl, arylalkyl,
(ii) R'" is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl
(iii) X is aryl,
(iv) Y is selected from hydrogen or
Figure imgf000019_0001
wherein (*) indicates a potential point of attachment to X and all other positions are substituted as described below. (1) According to the invention, a class of preferred PTPase activity- modulating compounds have the general structural Formula depicted in (A2):
Figure imgf000020_0001
(A2) wherein at least one of Rj, R2 and R3 substituents has the general structure depicted in
Formula (B)
X-C(R>C(R")COOR" (B)
wherein R , R , R and X are defined as above in Formula (Al), and wherein the remaining of Ri, R2 and R3 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl.
(2) According to the invention, a class of preferred PTPase activity- modulating compounds have the general structural Formula depicted in (A3):
Figure imgf000020_0002
(A3) wherein at least one of Rh R2 and R3 substituents has the general structure depicted in Formula (B)
X-C(R C(R")COOR" (B) wherein R , R , R and X are defined as above in Formula (Al), and wherein the remaining of R1 ? R2 and R3 are independently selected from the group consisting ofhydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkylcarbonyl, substituted alkylcarbonyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylcarbonyl, arylalkylcarbonyl.
(3) According to the invention, a class of preferred PTPase activity- modulating compounds have the general structural Formula depicted in (A4):
Figure imgf000021_0001
OH <A4) wherein at least one of Rj, R2 substituents has the general structure depicted in Formula (B)
X-C(R C(R")COOR" (B)
wherein R , R , R and X are defined as above in Formula (Al), and wherein the remaining of Rj, R2 is defined as above in Formula (A2).
(4) According to the invention, a class of preferred PTPase activity- modulating compounds have the general structural Formula depicted in (A5):
Figure imgf000021_0002
(A5) wherein at least one of Ri and R2 substituents has the general structure depicted in Formula (B)
X-C(R C(R")COOR" (B)
wherein R , R , R and X are defined as above in Formula (Al), and wherein the remaining of Rj. and R2 is defined as above in Formula (A2).
(5) According to the invention, a class of preferred PTPase activity- modulating compounds have the general structural Formula depicted in (A6):
Figure imgf000022_0001
R2 (A6) wherein at least one of R R2, R3 and R4 substituents has the general structure depicted in Formula (B)
X-C(R>C(R")COOR" (B)
wherein R , R , R and X are defined as above in Formula (Al), and wherein the remaining of Ri, R2, R3 and » have the same definition as Rj, R2 and R3 in Formula (A2), with the proviso that when R3 and R4 are selected from substituted phenyl or substituted furyl then the phenyl and furyl substituents exclude hydroxy, halo, trifluoromethyl, C]- alkyl, Cι-6alkyloxy, Cι-6alkylthio, amino, C ^alkylamino, di(Cι.6alkyl)amino, pheny!Cι-6alkylamino and di(phenylC1-6alkyl)amino. (6) According to the invention, a class of preferred PTPase activity- modulating compounds have the general structural Formula depicted in (A6):
Figure imgf000023_0001
γN-Rl
R2
(A6)
wherein R4 is selected from -COR5, -COOR6, -CONR7R8 wherein R5 thru R8 are selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, or R7 and R8 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl substituent, and wherein at least one of Rj, R2, and R3 substituents has the general structure depicted in Formula (B)
X-C(R')=C(R")COOR" (B)
wherein R , R , R and X are defined as above in Formula (Al), and wherein the remaining of Rb R2 and R3 are defined as above in Formula (A2).
(7) According to the invention, a class of preferred PTPase activity- modulating compounds have the general structural Formula depicted in (A6):
R* R,
Figure imgf000023_0002
I>2
(A6) wherein R\, R2, R3 and i are defined as above in (6).
(8) According to the invention, a class of preferred PTPase activity- modulating compounds have the general structural Formula depicted in (A7):
Figure imgf000024_0001
Ri
(A7)
wherein R2 is selected from -COR5, -COOR6, -CONR7R8 wherein R5 thru R8 are defined as above in (6) and wherein at least one of R] and R3 substituents has the general structure depicted in Formula (B)
X-C(R')=C(R")COOR"' (B)
wherein R , R , R and X are defined as above in Formula (Al), and wherein the remaining of R) and R are defined as above in Formula (A2).
(9) According to the invention, a class of preferred PTPase activity- modulating compounds have the general structural Formula depicted in (A8):
Ri R2
Figure imgf000024_0002
(A8) wherein at least one of R] and R2 substituents has the general structure depicted in Formula (B)
X-C(R')=C(R")C00R" (B)
wherein R , R , R and X are defined as above in Formula (Al), and wherein the remaining of Ri and R2 is defined as above in Formula (A2), and wherein m is an integer between 0 and 4 and each R3 is independently selected from the group consisting of halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl, hydroxypyronyl, alkyl, arylalkyl, C0- nalkyloxyCo-ii alkyl, arylC0-ιιalkyloxyC0-ιι alkyl, Co -πalkylthioCo-nalkyl, arylC0. iialkylthioCo-nalkyl, C0 .nalkylaminoCo-n alkyl, arylCo .nalkylaminoC0-ιιalkyl,
Figure imgf000025_0001
i jalkylcarbonylC0-ι ιalkyl, Cj.i i alkylcarboxy C0-ι lalkyl, ary l .i } alkylcarboxy C0- lialkyl, C^nalkylcarbonylaminoCo-n alkyl, arylCι.nalkylcarbonylaminoC0.ιιalkyl, -
C0-ιιalkylCOOR , -Co.ualkylCONR5R6 wherein j, R5 and Rg are independently selected from hydrogen, CpCn alkyl, ary lC0-Cπ alkyl, or R5 and R(, are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one CpCnalkyl, arylC0-Cn alkyl substituent.
(10) According to the invention, a class of preferred PTPase activity- modulating compounds have the general structural Formula depicted in (A8):
Figure imgf000025_0002
wherein R] is selected from -COR5, -COOR6, -CONR7R8 wherein R5 thru R8 are defined as above in (6) and wherein R2 has the general structure depicted in Formula (B)
X-C(R C(R")COOR"
(B) wherein R , R , R and X are defined as above in Formula (Al), and wherein m is an integer between 0 and 4 and each R3 is defined as above in (9).
(11) According to the invention, a class of preferred PTPase activity- modulating compounds have the general structural Formula depicted in (A9):
Figure imgf000026_0001
(A9) wherein m is an integer between 0 and 3 and wherein Rj, R2 each R3 is defined as above in (9).
(12) According to the invention, a class of preferred PTPase activity- modulating compounds have the general structural Formula depicted in (A9):
Ri 2
Figure imgf000026_0002
(A9) wherein either R\ or R2 is selected from -COR5, -COORg, -CONR7R8 wherein R5 thru R8 are defined as in (6) and wherein the remainder of Rj and R2 is defined as above in (9), and wherein m is an integer between 0 and 3 and each R3 is defined as above in (9).
(13) According to the invention, a class of preferred PTPase activity- modulating compounds have the general structural Formula depicted in (A10):
Figure imgf000027_0001
Z2
(A10) wherein Z\ and Z2 are independently selected from the group consisting of OR3, SRi,
NR5R6 and wherein at least one of Rl 5 R2 substituents has the general structure depicted in Formula (B)
X-C(R C(R")COOR" (B) wherein R , R , R and X are defined as above in Formula (Al), and wherein the remaining of Ri, R2 is defined as above in Formula (A2), and wherein R3, j, R5, Rg are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkylcarbonyl, substituted alkylcarbonyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylcarbonyl, arylalkylcarbonyl.
(14) According to the invention, a class of preferred PTPase activity - modulating compounds have the general structural Formula depicted in (Al 1):
Figure imgf000028_0001
Ri (All) wherein at least one of Rι_ R2, and R3 substituents has the general structure depicted in
Formula (B)
X-C(R')=C(R")COOR" (B)
wherein R , R , R and X are defined as above in Formula (Al), and wherein the remaining of Rls R2 and R3 are defined as above in Formula (A2).
Preferred compositions of the invention include compositions comprising compounds as defined above in structural formula (Al), (A2), (A3), (A4), (A5), (A6),
(A7), (A8), (A9), (A 10), (Al 1) (or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates of these compounds) in admixture with a pharmaceutically acceptable diluent, adjuvent, or carrier.
Provided according to the invention, therefore, are novel compounds which modulate the activity of PTPase or other molecules with pTyr recognition unit(s) as well as previously known aryl acrylic acid compounds which modulate the activity of PTPase or other molecules with pTyr recognition unit(s).
Another aspect of the present invention provides compositions comprising PTPase modulating compounds of the invention suitable for administration to a mammalian host. In a preferred embodiment the compounds of the invention act as inhibitors of PTPases, e.g. protein tyrosine phosphatases involved in the regulation of tyrosine kinase signaling pathways. Preferred embodiments include modulation of receptor- tyrosine kinase signaling pathways via interaction with regulatory PTPases, e.g. the signaling pathways of the insulin receptor, the IGF-I receptor and other members of the insulin receptor family, the EGF-receptor family, the platelet-derived growth factor family, the nerve growth factor receptor family, the hepatocyte growth factor receptor family, the growth hormone receptor family and members of other receptor- type tyrosine kinase families. Further preferred embodiments of the invention is modulation of non-receptor tyrosine kinase signaling through modulation of regulatory PTPases, e.g. modulation of members of the Src kinase family. One type of preferred embodiments of the invention relates to modulation of the activity of PTPases that negatively regulate signal transduction pathways. Another type of preferred embodiments of the inventions relate to modulation of the activity of PTPases that positively regulate signale transduction pathways.
In a preferred embodiment compounds of the inventions act as modulators of the active site of PTPases. In another preferred embodiment the compounds of the invention modulate the activity of PTPases via interaction with structures positioned outside the active sites of the enzymes, preferably SH2 domains. Further preferred embodiments include modulation of signal transduction pathways via binding of the compounds of the invention to SH2 domains or PTB domains of non-PTPase signaling molecules.
Other preferred embodiments include use of the compounds of the invention for modulation of cell-cell interactions as well as cell-matrix interactions.
As a preferred embodiment, the compounds of the invention may be used as therapeutics to inhibit PTPases involved in the regulation of the insulin recptor tyrosine kinase signaling pathway in patients with type I diabetes, type II diabetes, impaired glucose tolerance, insuline resistance and obesity. Further preferred embodiments include use of the compounds of the invention for treatment of disorders with general or specific dysfunction of PTPase activity, e.g. proliferative disorders including neoplastic diseases and psoriosis. As another embodiment, the compounds of the invention may be used in pharmaceutical preparations for treatment of osteoporosis.
Preferred embodiments of the invention further include use of compounds of the invention in pharmaceutical preparations to increase the secretion or action of growth hormone and its analogs or somatomedins including IGf-I and IGF-2 by modulating the activity of PTPases or other signal transduction molecules with affinity for phosphotyrosine involved controlling or inducing the action of these hormones or any regulating molecule.
To those skilled in the art, it is well known that the current and potential uses of growth hormone in humans are varied and muti-tudinous. Thus, compounds of the invention can be administered for purposes of stimulating the release of growth hormone from the pituitary or increase its action on target tissues thereby leading to similar effects or uses as growth hormone itself. The uses of growth hormone maybe summarized as follows: stimulation of growth hormone release in the elderly; prevention of catabolic side effects of glucocorticoids; treatment of osteoporosis, stimulation of the immune system; treatment of retardation, accelaration of wound healing; accelerating bone fracture repair; treatment of growth retardation; treating renal failure or insufficiency resulting in growth retardation; treatment of physiological short stature including growth hormone deficient children and short stature associated with chronic illness; treatment of obesity and growth retardation associated with obesity; treating growth retardation associated with the Pader-Willi syndrom and Turner's syndrom; accelerating the recovery and reducing hospitalization of burn patients; treatment of intrauterine growth retardation, skeletal dysplasia, hypercortisolism and Cushings syndrome; induction of pulsatile growth hormone release; replacement of growth hormone in stressed patients; treatment of osteochondro-dysplasis, Noonans syndrome, schizophrenia, depressions, Alzheimer's disease, delayed wound healing and psychosocial deprivation; treatment of pulmonary dysfunction and ventilator dependency; attenuation of protein catabolic responses after major surgery; reducing cachexia and protein loss due to chronic illness such as cancer or AIDS; treatment of hyperinsulinemia including nesidio-blastosis; adjuvant treatment for ovulation induction; stimulation of thymic development and prevention of age related decline or thymic function; treatment of immunosuppresed patients; improvement in muscle strength, mobility, maintenance of skin thickness, metabolic homeostasis, renal homeostasis in the frail elderly; stimulation of osteoblasts, bone remodelling and cartilage growth; stimulation of the immune system in companion animals and treatment of disorder of aging in companion animals; growth promotant in livestock and stimulation of wool growth in sheep.
The compounds of the invention may be used in pharmaceutical preparations for treatment of various disorders of the immune system, either as stimulant or suppresor of normal or perturbed immune functions, including autoimmune reactions. Further embodiments of the invention for treatment of allergic reactions, e.g. asthma, dermal reactions, conjunctivitis.
In another embodiment, compounds of the invention may be used in pharmaceutical preparations for prevention or induction of platelet aggregation.
In yet another embodiment, compounds of the invention may be used in pharmaceutical preparations for treatment of infectious disorders. In particular, the compounds of the invention may be used for treatment of infectious disorders caused by Yersinia and other bacteria as well as disorders caused by viruses or other microorganisms.
Compounds of the invention may additionally be used for treatment or prevention of diseases in animals, including commercially important animals.
Also included in the present invention is a process for isolation of PTPases via affinity purification procedures based on the use of immobilized compounds of the invention using procedures well-known to those skilled in the art.
The invention is further directed to a method for detecting the presence of PTPases in cell or in a subject comprising
(a) contacting said cell or an extract thereof with labeled compounds of the invention. (b) detecting the binding of the compounds of the invention or measuring the quantity bound, thereby detecting the presence or measuring the quantity of certain PTPases.
The invention further relates to analysis and identification of the specific functions of certain PTPases by modulating their activity by using compounds of the invention in cellular assay systems or in whole animals.
The invention further provides methods for making compounds (Al), (A2), (A3), (A4), (A5), (A6), (A7), (A8), (A9), (AlO), (Al l) of the present invention having PTPase-modulatory/inhibitory activity. In preferred methods, compounds of the invention are synthesized in a multi-component combinatorial array, which permits rapid synthesis of numerous, structurally related compounds for subsequent evaluation. In preferred synthesis protocols, the acrylic acid moiety of a compound is protected during synthesis by, e.g., esterification with a tert-butyl protecting group. Thus, a preferred method of making compounds of the invention comprises use of a protected acrylic acid reagent and removal of the protective group by, e.g., treatment of a precursor ester compound with acid. Optionally, such a method includes further esterifying or salifying the acrylic acid product thereby obtained.
The compounds of formula (Al), (A2), (A3), (A4), (A5), (A6), (A7), (A8), (A9), (AlO), (Al 1) may be prepared by procedures known to those skilled in the art from known compounds or readily preparable intermediates. General synthetic procedures and examples are as follow:
General method for the removal of tert-butyl esters
° 50% TFA-CH2C12 °
R OtBu R OH
Unless otherwise stated, tert-butyl esters were converted to their corresponding carboxylic acids via treatment with a solution of 50% trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane for 1 hour at 23°C. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the residue was azeotroped with toluene or acetonitrile to yield the corresponding carboxylic acid.
General method for the synthesis of compounds (Al) and (A5) Method 1
X - LG + Z-C(R')= C(R")C02R *~ X-C(R')= C(R")C02R
1 2 (Al) or (A5)
By allowing a compound of formula (1) wherein LG is a suitable leaving group such as bromo, iodo, or triflate to react with compound of formula (2) wherein Z is hydrogen (Heck reaction: J. Org. Chem., 1977, 42, 3903), or trialkyltin (Stille reaction: J Am. Chem. Soc, 1991, 775, 9585), or B(OH)2 (Suzuki reaction: J. Am. Chem. Soc, 1989, 777, 314) and wherein R , R , R and X are defined as above for formula (A 1).
These reactions may be carried out neat or in a solvent such as dimethylformamide (DMF), tetrahydrofuran (THF), or toluene, in the presence of a catalyst (e.g. Pd(OAc)2, Pd(PPh3)4, Pd2dba3), a ligand (e.g. Ph3P, Ph3As, (o-tolyl)3P) and a base (e.g. K2CO3, CsCC»3, Et3N) at temperatures ranging from 23°C to 130°C, for 1 to 60 hours.
Examples
Figure imgf000034_0001
Prepared according to Patel et al (J. Org. Chem., 1977, 42, 3903). Η NMR of 3 (400 MHz, CDC13) δ 1.5 (s, 9H), 6.4 (d, 1H), 7.6 (m, 3H),
8.05 (d, 2H).
Figure imgf000034_0002
Prepared according to Patel et al (J. Org. Chem. , 1977, 42, 3903).
Η NMR of 4 (400 MHz, CDC13) 5 1.5 (s, 9H), 6.4 (d, 1H), 7.55 (d, 1H), 7.6 (d, 2H), 7.8 (d, 2H), 9.95 (s, 1H).
Figure imgf000035_0001
Prepared according to Patel et al (J. Org. Chem., 1977, 42, 3903).
Η NMR of 5 (400 MHz, CDC13) 6 1.44 (s, 9H), 6.26 (d, IH), 7.18 (d, IH),
7.56 (d, lH), 7.74 (d, IH).
Figure imgf000035_0002
Prepared according to Patel et al (J. Org. Chem. 1977, 42, 3903).
'H NMR of 6 (400 MHz, CDC13) δ 1.5 (s, 18H), 6.42 (d, 2H), 7.6 (m, 6H),
7.9 (d, 4H).
Figure imgf000036_0001
C02tBu
Prepared according to Patel et al (J. Org. Chem. 1977, 42, 3903).
Η NMR of 7 (400 MHz, CDC13) δ 1.5 (s, 18H), 6.2 (d, 2H), 7.1 (d, 2H),
7.35 (d, 2H), 7.5 (s, 2H), 7.7 (d, 2H).
Figure imgf000036_0002
To l lg of 4,4 '-dibromobenzil (30mmol, l .Oequiv), 67mg of palladium (II) acetate (0.3mmol, O.Olequiv), 365mg of tri-o-tolylphosphine (1.2mmol, 0.04equiv) was added 200mL of dimethylformamide followed by 4.2mL (30mmol, l.Oequiv) of triethylamine. The mixture was placed in a 100°C preheated bath and 4.4mL of tert- butylacrylate (30mmol, l.Oequiv) in 30mL of dimethylforamide was added dropwise over 1 hour. The reaction mixture was heated at 100°C for 12 hours, cooled to 23 °C and the solvent was removed in vacuo. Ethyl acetate was added and the organic layer was washed with water and dried over sodium sulfate. The solvent was removed and the residue (mixture of dibromobenzil, mono and bis-tert-butylacrylate benzil) was recrystallized from hot 30% dichloromethane in hexane. The solid which crashed out (mixture of dibromobenzil and mono-tert-butylacrylate benzil) was filtered off and treated with 20% trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane. After 20 minutes, the mono-tert-butylacrylate benzil 8 was filtered off and washed with 20% trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane (1.4g isolated). The mother liquor (mixture of mono and bis- tert-butylacrylate benzil) was recovered and purified by flash chromatography (ethyl acetate-hexane eluant) to yield 2.4g of the mono-tert-butylacrylate dione which was treated with 20%) trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane to give 2.2g of 8. The combined total yield of 8 was 3.6g (34%). Η NMR of 8 (400 MHz, d6-DMSO) δ 6.7 (d, IH), 7.6 (d, IH), 7.8 (s, 4H), 7.9 (s, 4H).
Figure imgf000037_0001
'H NMR of 9 (400 MHz, d6-DMSO) δ 6.7 (d, 2H), 7.6 (d, 2H), 7.9 (s, 8H).
Figure imgf000037_0002
Prepared according to Patel et al (J. Org. Chem., 1977, 42, 3903). Η NMR of 10 (400 MHz, CDCl3-CD3OD 9: 1) δ 1.45 (s, 9H), 6.42 (d, IH), 6.5 (d, IH), 7.55 (d, IH), 7.6 (dd, 4H), 7.68 (d, IH), 7.92 (dd, 4H).
Figure imgf000038_0001
To a solution of 10 (1 equiv) in dichloromethane was added octylamine (1 equiv), EDCI (1.3 equiv) and 4-dimethylaminopyridine (0.5 equiv) at 23°C. The solution was stirred overnight, diluted with ethyl acetate, washed with IN HCl and saturated sodium bicarbonate and dried over sodium sulfate. The residue was purified by flash chromatography (ethyl acetate-hexane eluant) and the solvent was removed in vacuo to yield compound 11. Η NMR of 11 (400 MHz, CDC13) δ 0.9 (t, 3H), 1.25 (s br, 10H), 1.5 (s, 9H), 1.55 (s br, 2H), 3.35 (dd, H), 5.6 (t br, IH), 6.44 9d, IH), 6.48 (d, IH), 7.58 (m, 6H), 7.92 (d, 4H).
Figure imgf000039_0001
Same procedure as compound 11. Η NMR of 12 (400 MHz, CDC13) δ 1.5 (s, H), 2.83 (t, 2H), 3.62 (dt, 2H), 5.82 (t br, IH), 6.4 (m, 2H), 7.18 (m, 5H), 7.6 (m, H), 7.9 (m, 4H).
Figure imgf000039_0002
C02tBu C02H
Method 2
Figure imgf000040_0001
: Functionalized crosslinked polystyrene polymer
Figure imgf000040_0002
By allowing a compound of formula (1) as defined above to react with polymer bound compound of formula (14) wherein Z, R and R are defined as above in method 1.
These reactions may be carried out on functionalized cross linked polystyrene polymers such as Merrifield resin, Wang resin, Rink resin, Tentagel™ resin, in a solvent such as dimethylformamide (DMF), tetrahydrofuran (THF), or toluene, in the presence of a catalyst (e.g. Pd(OAc)2, Pd(PPh3)4, Pd2dba3), a ligand (e.g. Ph3P, Ph3As, (o-tolyl)3P) and a base (e.g. K2CO3, CsCO3, Et3N) at temperatures ranging from 23°C to 130°C, for 1 to 60 hours.
Examples
Figure imgf000040_0003
15
For leading references see: a) Mathias (Synthesis 1979, 561). b) Sarantakis et al (Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 1976, 73, 336). c) Hudson et al (Peptide Chemistry 1985 (Kiso, Y., ed.), 1986, Protein Research Foundation, Osaka.), d) Wang (J. Am. Chem. Soc 1973, 95, 1328). e) Lu et al (J. Org. Chem. 1981, 46, 3433.) e) Morphy et al (Tetrahedron Letters 1996, 37, 3209). e) Yedidia et al (Can. J. Chem. 1980, 55, 1144). To lOg (11.2mmol, lequiv) of Wang resin in 80mL of dry dichloromethane was added 33.6mmol (3equiv) of diisopropylcarbodiimide and the mixture was sonnicated under N2 for 2 hours (final bath temperature was 40°C). Freshly distilled acrylic acid (33.6mmol, 3equiv) and 4-dimethylaminopyridine (11.2mmol, lequiv) were added and the mixture was magnetically stirred for 16 hours at ambient temperature. The resin was filtered and thoroughly washed with dichloromethane (500mL), methanol (500mL), dimethylformamide (500mL), dichloromethane (500mL) and methanol (500mL) and dried in vacuo (O.lmmHg) for 24 hours. The coupling was repeated and resin 15 was filtered, washed and dried as above, and used directly in the next step.
Figure imgf000041_0001
To 8.2g of acrylate Wang resin 15 was added 10.4g (28.3mmol) of 4,4'- dibromobenzil, 437mg of palladium (II) acetate (1.95mmol), 1.25g of tri-o- tolylphosphine (4.11mmol), 95mL of dimethylformamide followed by 3.3mL (23.7mmol) of triethylamine. The mixture was placed in a 100°C preheated bath and stirred magnetically at 200rpm for 2 hours. The resin was filtered hot and washed thoroughly with hot dimethylformamide (500mL), hot acetic acid (500mL), methanol (500mL), dichloromethane (500mL), dimethylformamide (500mL), dichloromethane
(500mL) and methanol (500mL) and dried in vacuo (O.lmmHg) for 24 hours. The linker was cleaved from the resin with a solution of 20% trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane for 20min at ambient temperature. Η NMR for monobromo- monoacid linker (400 MHz, d6-DMSO) δ 6.7 (d, 2H), 7.6 (d, 2H), 7.8 (s, 4H), 7.9 (s, 4H).
Figure imgf000042_0001
To 10.2g resin 16 was added 5.41mL (37mmol) of tert-butylacrylate, 132mg of palladium (II) acetate (0.592mmol), 0.360g of tri-o-tolylphosphine (l.lδmmol), 31mL of dimethylformamide followed by lmL (7.4mmol) of triethylamine. The mixture was placed in a 100°C preheated bath and stirred magnetically at 200rpm for 18 hours. The resin was filtered hot and washed thoroughly with hot dimethylformamide (500mL), hot acetic acid (500mL), methanol (500mL), dichloromethane (500mL), dimethylformamide (500mL), dichloromethane (500mL) and methanol (500mL) and dried in vacuo (O.lmmHg) for 24 hours. The linker was cleaved from the resin with a solution of 20% trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane for 20min at ambient temperature. Η NMR for diacid linker (400 MHz, dg-DMSO) δ 6.7 (d, 2H), 7.6 (d, 2H), 7.9 (s, 8H).
Figure imgf000042_0002
To lg of acrylate resin 15 was added 1.02g (2.8mmol) of mono-bromo-mono- tert-butylacrylate benzil (8), 0.044g of palladium (II) acetate (0.19mmol), 0.130g of tri-o-tolylphosphine (0.41 mmol), lOmL of dimethylformamide followed by a solution of 0.76mL (5.7mmol) of triethylamine in lOmL of dimethylformamide. The mixture was placed in a 100°C preheated bath and stirred magnetically at 200rpm for 2 hours. The resin was filtered hot and washed thoroughly with hot dimethylformamide (50mL), water (50mL), 10% sodium bicarbonate (50mL), 10% aqueous acetic acid (50mL), water (50mL), methanol (50mL), dichloromethane (50mL), methanol (50mL), dichloromethane (50mL) and dried in vacuo (O.lmmHg) for 24 hours. The linker was cleaved from the resin with a solution of 20% trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane for 20min at ambient temperature. Η NMR for diacid linker (400 MHz, dg-DMSO) δ 6.7 (d, 2H), 7.6 (d, 2H), 7.9 (s, 8H).
Figure imgf000043_0001
18 19
Resin 18 was treated with a 1.0M solution of oxalyl chloride in dichloromethane in the presence of a catalytic amount of dimethylformamide for 1 hour and filtered. The resin was subsequently treated with a dichloromethane solution containing the alcohol (ROH), pyridine and 4-dimethylaminopyridine for 20 hours at
23 °C to yield the monoester resin 19.
Figure imgf000043_0002
Resin 18 was treated with a 1.0M solution of oxalyl chloride in dichloromethane in the presence of a catalytic amount of dimethylformamide for 1 hour and filtered. The resin was subsequently treated with a dichloromethane solution containing the aromatic amine (ArN(Rj)H), pyridine and 4-dimethylaminopyridine for 20 hours at 23°C to yield the monoamide resin 20.
Figure imgf000044_0001
Resin 18 was treated with a dichloromethane solution containing the amine (R]R2NH), EDCI and 4-dimethylaminoρyridine for 20 hours at 23 °C to yield the monoamide resin 21.
General methods for the synthesis of compounds (A2) and (AlO) Method 1
Figure imgf000044_0002
OH
(AlO)-l
By allowing an aldehyde (R]CHO) wherein Ri is defined as above in formula (AlO) to react with itself.
These reactions may be carried out in a solvent or combination of solvents such as tetrahydrofuran (THF), dichloromethane (CH2C12), in the presence of a catalyst (e.g. TiCl3), and a base (e.g. pyridine) at temperatures ranging from -78°C to 23°C, for 1 to 60 hours. Examples
Figure imgf000045_0001
Prepared according to Araneo et al (Tetrahedron Lett. 1994, 35, 2213). The reaction was stirred for 4hrs at 23°C. Η NMR of 22 (400MHz, CDC13) δ 1.55 (s, 18H), 4.65 (s, 2H), 6.27 (d, 2H), 7.05 (d, 4H), 7.31 (d, 4H), 7.5 (d, 2H).
Figure imgf000045_0002
Η NMR of 23 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 4.65 (s, 2H), 6.4 (d, 2H), 7.15 (d, 4H), 7.4 (d, 4H), 7.6 (d, 2H). MS ESI (neg ion) for [M-H]': 353 (calculated 354).
Method 2
Figure imgf000045_0003
OH OH O (AlO)-l (A10)-2 (A2) By allowing a compound of formula (AlO)-l prepared as above to react with a acid chloride (R2CO2H) and by subsequently oxidizing (A10)-2 wherein Ri and R2 are defined as in formula (A2).
The first step in this reaction may be carried out in a solvent such as tetrahydrofuran (THF), dichloromethane (CH2C12), in the presence of diisopropyl carbodiimide (DIC) and a base (e.g. 4-dimethylaminopyridine) at temperatures ranging from 0°C to 23 °C, for 1 to 60 hours. The second step in this reaction may be carried out in a solvent such as dichloromethane (CH2C12), in the presence of an oxidizing reagent (e.g. tetrapropylammonium perruthenate (VII) (TPAP)) and activated 4A molecular sieves at temperatures ranging from 0°C to 23°C, for 1 to 60 hours.
Examples
Figure imgf000047_0001
To 50mg of diol 22 (1 equiv) in lmL of dichloromethane was added diisopropyl carbodiimide (0.4 equiv) and the reaction was stirred for 1 hour at 23°C. To the solution was added 4-dimethylaminopyridine (0.1 equiv) followed by para- methoxybenzoic acid (0.4 equiv) in 5mL of tetrahydrofuran and the mixture was stirred for an additional 3 hours at 23 °C. The reaction was diluted with ethyl acetate and washed with IN HCl, saturated sodium bicarbonate and the organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate. The crude mixture was separated using radial chromatography (ethyl acetate-hexane eluent). Η NMR of 24 (400MHz, CDC13) δ 1.55 (s, 18H), 3.8 (s, 3H), 5.05 (d, IH), 6.0 (d, IH), 6.25 (d, IH), 6.3 (d, IH), 6.9 (d, 2H), 7.1 (d, 4H), 7.32 (m, 4H), 7.45 (d, IH), 7.48 (d, IH), 8.0 (d, IH).
Figure imgf000047_0002
OMe 'H NMR of 25 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 3.82 (s, 3H), 5.08 (d, IH), 6.02 (d, IH), 6.4 (d, 2H), 6.9 (d, 2H), 7.22 (d, 4H), 7.42 (d, 4H), 7.6 (d, 2H), 8.03 (d, 2H). MS ESI (neg ion) for [M-H]": 487 (calculated 488).
Figure imgf000048_0001
Hydroxyester 24 (1 equiv) was oxidized to ketoester 26 at 23°C in CH2C12, in the presence of catalytic amount of TPAP (0.1 equiv), N-methylmorpholine oxide (2 equiv) and 4A activated powdered molecular sieves (500mg/mol of substrate). Η NMR of 26 (400MHz, CDC13) δ 1.55 (s, 18H), 3.8 (s, 3H), 6.25 (d, IH), 6.29 (d, IH), 6.9 (d, 2H), 7.0 (s, IH), 7.5 (m, 10H), 7.95 (d, IH), 8.02 (d, IH).
Figure imgf000048_0002
Η NMR of 27 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 3.82 (s, 3H), 6.45 (d, IH), 6.55 (d, IH),
6.95 (d, 2H), 7.18 (s, IH), 7.65 (m, 10H), 8.0 (d, IH), 8.08 (d, IH). Method 3
RjCOCl + R2CHO *
Figure imgf000049_0001
(A10)-3 (A2)
By allowing an acid chloride (RjCOCl) to react with an aldehyde (R2CHO) wherein Ri, R2 are defined as above in formula (A2) and by subsequently oxidizing (A10)-3.
The first step in this reaction may be carried out in a solvent or a combination of solvents such as tetrahydrofuran (THF), dichloromethane (CH2C12), in the presence of a catalyst (e.g. TiCl3), and a base (e.g. pyridine) at temperatures ranging from - 78°C to 23°C, for 1 to 60 hours. The second step in this reaction may be carried out in a solvent such as dichloromethane (CH2C12), in the presence of an oxidizing reagent (e.g. tetrapropylammonium perruthenate (VII) (TPAP)) and activated 4A molecular sieves at temperatures ranging from 0°C to 23 °C, for 1 to 60 hours.
Examples
Figure imgf000049_0002
COztBu C02tBu C02tBu
4 28
Prepared according to Araneo et al (Tetrahedron Lett. 1994, 35, 2213). The reaction was stirred for 4hrs at 23 °C, the crude mixture was separated by flash chromatography (ethyl acetate in hexane eluent) to yield hydroxyester 28. Η NMR of 28 (400MHz, CDC13) δ 1.55 (s, 18H), 1.6 (m, 4H), 2.2-2.4 (m, 4H), 3.6 (s, 3H), 4.9 (d, IH), 5.85 (d, IH), 6.25 (d, IH), 6.3 (d, IH), 7.07 (m, 4H), 7.3 (m, 4H), 7.45 (m, 2H).
Figure imgf000050_0001
'H NMR of 29 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 1.5 (m, 4H), 2.3 (m, 2H), 2.4 (m, 2H), 3.6 (s, 3H), 4.95 (d, IH), 5.85 (d, IH), 6.4 (d, 2H), 7.2 (m, 4H), 7.42 (d, 4H), 7.6 (d,
2H). MS ESI (neg ion) for [M-H]": 495 (calculated 496).
Figure imgf000050_0002
Hydroxyester 28 was oxidized to ketoester 30 as above. Η NMR of 30
(400MHz, CDC13) δ 1.55 (s, 18H), 1.65 (s br, 4H), 2.3 (m, 2H), 2.5 (m, 2H), 3.6 (s, 3H), 6.3 (d, IH), 6.35 (d, IH), 6.78 (s, IH), 7.4-7.6 (m, 8H), 7.9 (d, 2H). General method for the synthesis of compounds (A3) Method 1
Figure imgf000051_0001
(A3)-l
By allowing a carboxylic acid (RιCO2H) to react with an isocyanide (R2NC) and an aldehyde (R3CHO) wherein R\ , R2, and R3 are defined as above in formula (A3).
These reactions may be carried out in a solvent or a combination of solvents such as dichloromethane (CH2C12), chloroform (CHC13), methanol (MeOH), tetrahydrofuran (THF) or acetonitrile (CH3CN), in the presence or absence of a catalyst (e.g. ZnCl2, MgBr2) at temperatures ranging from -78°C to 80°C, for 1 to 60 hours.
Examples
Figure imgf000051_0002
31
Prepared according to Passerini (Gazz. Chim. Ital 1926, 56, 826). A solution of the carboxylic acid, aldehyde and isocyanide in a given solvent selected from tetrahydrofuran, acetonitrile, ethyl ether or chloroform was stirred between 0° and 25°C for 1 to 3 days. The solution was diluted with ethyl acetate, washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate and dried over sodium sulfate. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the residue was purified by silica gel chromatography.
Figure imgf000052_0001
Η NMR of 32 (400 MHz, d6-acetone) δ 0.8 (t, 3H), 1.1-1.6 (m, 9H), 1.97 (m, IH), 3.9 (m, 2H), 4.1 (m, 2H), 5.3 (t, IH), 6.62 (d, IH), 7.7 (d, IH), 7.8 (d, 2H), 8.05
(d, 2H).
Method 2
RjCOjH + RgCHO
Figure imgf000052_0002
(A3)-2 : Functionalized crosslinked polystyrene polymer
Figure imgf000052_0003
By allowing a carboxylic acid (RιCO2H) and an aldehyde (R3CHO) to react with a polymer bound isocyanide (R2NC) wherein Rj, R2, and R3 are defined as above in formula (A3).
These reactions may be carried out on functionalized cross linked polystyrene polymers such as Merrifield resin, Wang resin, Rink resin, Tentagel™ resin, in a solvent or a combination of solvents such as dichloromethane (CH2C12), chloroform (CHCI3), methanol (MeOH), tetrahydrofuran (THF), acetonitrile (CH3CN), in the presence or absence of a catalyst (e.g. ZnCl2, MgBr2) at temperatures ranging from - 78°C to 80°C, for 1 to 60 hours. The product maybe released from the polymer by conditions known to those skilled in the art.
Examples
Figure imgf000053_0001
WANG
33
Prepared according to Zhang et al (Tetrahedron Letters 1996, 37, 751).
Figure imgf000053_0002
A solution of the carboxylic acid 3 in tetrahydrofuran was added to a mixture of the aldehyde and isocyanide resin 33 in tetrahydrofuran or acetonitrile. The mixture was stirred at 25°C or 60°C for 1 to 3 days. The resin was filtered and washed with dichloromethane and methanol and dried. Compounds 34 were isolated after treatment of the resin with a solution of 50% trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane for 1 hour at 23 °C and removal of the solvent in vacuo.
Figure imgf000054_0001
A solution of the carboxylic acid in tetrahydrofuran was added to a mixture of the aldehyde 4 and isocyanide resin 33 in tetrahydrofuran or acetonitrile. The mixture was stirred at 25°C or 60°C for 1 to 3 days. The resin was filtered and washed with dichloromethane and methanol and dried. Compounds 35 were isolated after treatment of the resin with a solution of 50% trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane for 1 hour at 23 °C and removal of the solvent in vacuo.
Figure imgf000055_0001
TABLE 1.
Figure imgf000055_0002
Figure imgf000056_0001
Figure imgf000056_0002
General method for the synthesis of compounds (A4)
RjCOCl + R2CHO *-
Figure imgf000057_0001
OH
(A4)
By allowing an acid chloride (RiCOCl) to react with an aldehyde (R2CHO) wherein Rb R2 are defined as above in formula (A4).
These reactions may be carried out in a solvent or combination of solvents such as tetrahydrofuran (THF), dichloromethane (CH2C12), in the presence of a catalyst (e.g. TiCl3), and a base (e.g. pyridine) at temperatures ranging from -78°C to 23 °C, for 1 to 60 hours.
Example
Figure imgf000057_0002
51
Prepared according to Araneo et al (Tetrahedron Lett. 1994, 35, 2213). Η NMR of 51 (400MHz, CDC13) δ 1.45 (s, 9H), 1.5 (m, 4H), 2.1-2.3 (m, 4H), 3.6 (s, 3H), 4.6 (s, IH), 6.25 (d, IH), 6.97 (d, 2H), 7.25 (d, 2H), 7.5 (d, IH). General methods for the synthesis of compounds (A6) Method 1
Figure imgf000058_0001
(A5)-l (A6)-l (A6)-2
By allowing a compound of formula (A5) to react with an aldehyde (R2CHO), a primary amine (RιNH2) and ammonium acetate wherein Ri, R2, R3 and R4 are defined as above in formula (A6).
These reactions may be carried out in a solvent such as acetic acid (AcOH) at temperatures ranging from 23 °C to 120°C, for 1 to 60 hours.
Examples
Figure imgf000058_0002
Prepared according to Krieg et al (Z Naturforsch teil 1967, 22b, 132).
To 47mg of 6 (O.lmmol, l.Oequiv), R2CHO (O.lmmol, l .Oequiv) in lmL of acetic acid was added 231mg of ammonium acetate (3.0mmol, 30equiv) in 0.5mL of acetic acid and the mixture was placed in 100°C preheated oil bath for 1 hour. The solution was then poured into ether and washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate. The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to yield the desired imidazoles 52 which were purified by preparative thin layer chromatography with ethyl acetate-hexane or methanol-dichloromethane as eluent.
Figure imgf000059_0001
52 53
TABLE 3.
Figure imgf000059_0002
Figure imgf000060_0001
* " ". : data not available.
Figure imgf000061_0001
54 (400MHz, CDCI3-CD3OD 10:1) δ 6.23 (d, 2H), 7.3-7.48 (m, 10H), 7.88 (d, 2H),
8.02 (d, 2H).
55 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 6.5 (d, 2H), 7.52 (d, 4H), 7.7 (m, 6H), 9.1 (s,lH).
56 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ6.3 (s, 2H), 6.52 (d, 2H), 7.4-7.9 (m, 12H).
57 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 6.52 (d, 2H), 7.50-8.36 (m, 14H).
58 (400MHz, CDCI3-CD3OD 10:1) δ 3.7 (s, 3H), 6.3 (d, 2H), 6.85 (d, 2H), 7.4 (m, 8H), 7.5 (d, 2H), 7.85 (d, 2H).
59 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 3.98 (s, 3H), 6.52 (d, 2H), 7.50-7.76 (m, 13H).
60 (400MHz, CDCI3-CD3OD 10:1) δ 6.3 (d, 2H), 6.5 (br s, IH), 6.85 (d, 2H), 7.3-7.6 (m, 12H).
61 di-tert-butyl ester (400MHz, CDCI3-CD3OD 6: 1) δ 1.4 (s, 18H), 6.2 (d, 2H),
6.9 (t, IH), 7.2-7.42 (m, 11H), 7.58 (d, IH), 7.62 (d, IH).
62 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 6.50 (d, 2H), 7.30-8.70 (m, 12H).
63 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 6.54 (d, 2H), 7.46-8.60 (m, 16H). 4 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 3.90 (s, 3H), 6.50 (d, 2H), 7.50-8.30 (m, 13H).
5 di-tert-butyl ester (400MHz, CDCI3-CD3OD 6:1) δ 1.4 (s, 18H), 6.2 (d, 2H),
6.65 (t, IH), 7.3-7.5 (m, 12H).
6 di-tert-butyl ester (400MHz, CDCI3-CD3OD 6:1) δ 1.4 (s, 18H), 6.2 (dd, 2H),
7.1 (q, IH), 7.3-7.5 (m, 10H), 7.6 (br d, IH), 7.7 (dd, IH).
7 di-tert-butyl ester (400MHz, CDCl3-CD3OD 6:1) δ 1.4 (s, 18H), 6.2 (d, 2H), 7.1 (t, 2H), 7.3-7.5 (m, 10H), 7.75 (m, IH).
8 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 1.2 (t, 6H), 3.48 (q, 4H), 6.52 (d, 2H), 7.3-8.02 (m, 15H).
69 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 3.96 (s, 3H), 6.52 (d, 2H), 7.04-7.70 (m, 13H).
70 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 6.46 (d, 2H), 7.14 (d, IH), 7.50-7.80 (m, 12H).
71 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 4.32 (m, 4H), 6.52 (d, 2H), 7.1-7.7 (m, 13H).
72 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 3.90-4.02 (3s, 9H), 6.50 (d, 2H), 6.90-7.80 (m, 12H).
73 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 6.5 (d, 2H), 7.55 (d, 4H), 7.65 (m, 6H), 7.95 (d, 2H), 8.15 (d, 2H).
74 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 3.95 (s, 3H), 6.56 (d, 2H), 6.9-7.82 (m, 14H).
75 (400MHz, CDCI3-CD3OD 10:1) δ 6.34 (d, 2H), 7.3-7.4 (m, 1 IH), 7.52 (d, 2H), 8.92 (d,2H). 76 di-tert-butyl ester (400MHz, CDCl3-CD3OD 6:1) δ 1.4 (s, 18H), 6.2 (br d, 2H), 6.9 (m, IH), 7.05 (m, IH), 7.3-7.5 (m, 10H).
77 (400MHz, CDCl3-CD3OD 6:1) δ 0.9 (m, 5H), 1.3 (m, 2H), 1.7 (m, 2H), 2.9 (t, 2H), 6.35 (d, 2H), 7.3-7.6 (m, 10H).
78 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 6.50 (d, 2H), 7.40-7.9 (m, 14H).
79 di-tert-butyl ester (400MHz, CDC13) δ 1.4 (s, 18H), 6.3 (d, 2H), 7.1 (d, 2H), 7.22 (d, IH), 7.34 (t, 2H), 7.4-7.7 (m, 14H), 7.9 (d, 2H).
80 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 6.54 (d, 2H), 7.6-8.0 (m, 19H).
81 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 6.54 (d, 2H), 7.6-8.90 (m, 19H).
82 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 6.50 (d, 2H), 7.58-8.0 (m, 14H).
83 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 3.96 (s, 3H), 6.52 (d, 2H), 7.36-7.90 (m, 13H).
84 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 6.50 (d, 2H), 7.55-7.70 (m, 1 OH).
85 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 6.12 (s, 2H), 6.56 (d, 2H), 7.10-7.60 (m, 13H).
86 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 2.20 (s, 3H), 2.40 (s, 3H), 3.90 (s, 3H), 6.52 (d, 2H), 7.10-7.70 (m, 12H).
87 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 5.20 (s, 2H), 6.56 (d, 2H), 7.22-7.98 (m, 19H). 88 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 1.52 (2s, 12H), 1.74 (s, 4H), 2.42 (s, 3H), 6.52 (d, 2H),
7.40-7.68 (m, 13H).
89 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 1.12 (t, 2H), 3.0 (m, 4H), 6.56 (d, 2H), 7.52-7.62 (m, 13H).
90 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 2.14 (s, 3H), 6.54 (d, 2H), 7.58-8.0 (m, 14H).
Figure imgf000064_0001
Prepared according to Krieg et al (Z Naturforsch teil 1967, 22b, 132). Η NMR of 91 (400 MHz, CD3OD) δ 3.9 (s,3H), 6.2 (d, 2H), 6.95 (d, 2H), 7.2 (d, 2H), 7.4-7.6 (m, 6H), 7.9 (d, 2H).
Figure imgf000064_0002
Prepared according to Krieg et al (Z Naturforsch teil 1967, 22b, 132).
Figure imgf000065_0001
92 R,2
93
TABLE 4.
Figure imgf000065_0002
94 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ θ.8 (t, 3H), 1.22 (m, 2H), 1.62 (m, 2H), 4.10 (t, 2H),
6.42 (d, IH), 6.58 (d, IH), 7.32-7.80 (m, 10H), 9.18 (s, IH).
95 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 0.64 (t, 3H), 1.04 (m, 2H), 1.58 (m, 2H), 4.20 (t, 2H), 6.42 (d, IH), 6.62 (d, IH), 7.42-8.0 (m, 13H).
96 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 6.42 (2d, 2H), 7.12-7.68 (m, 18H).
97 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 0.6 (t, 3H), 1.0 (m, 2H), 1.38 (m, 2H), 4.12 (t, 2H), 3.84 (s, 3H), 6.42 (d, IH), 6.62 (d, IH), 7.22-7.8 (m, 13H).
98 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 3.80 (s, 3H), 6.44 (2d, 2H), 6.94-7.68 (m, 19H).
99 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 6.44 (2d, 2H), 7.20-7.60 (m, 15H), 9.2 (s, IH).
100 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 1.22 (s, 9H), 2.40 (s, 3H), 6.36-6.44 (2d, 2H),
7.26-7.60 (m, 18H).
Method 2
Figure imgf000066_0001
(A5)-2 (A6)-3 (A6)-4 By allowing a polymer bound compound of formula (A5)-2 to react with an aldehyde (R2CHO), a primary amine (R]NH2) and ammonium acetate wherein Rl9 R2, R3 and R are defined as above in formula (A6).
These reactions may be carried out on functionalized cross linked polystyrene polymers such as Merrifield resin, Wang resin, Rink resin, Tentagel™ resin, in a solvent such as acetic acid (AcOH) at temperatures ranging from 23 °C to 120°C, for 1 to 60 hours. The product maybe released from the polymer using conditions known to those skilled in the art.
Examples
Figure imgf000067_0001
To resin 17 were added excess NH4OAc and R2CHO and acetic acid and the mixture was heated at 100°C for 15 hours, cooled to 23 °C and washed with methanol and dichloromethane and dried under vacuum. The trifluoroacetate salts of imidazoles 101 were isolated following treatment of the resin with a solution of 20% trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane for 20 minutes at 23 °C.
Figure imgf000067_0002
Same procedure as imidazoles 101. TABLE 5.
Figure imgf000068_0001
Figure imgf000069_0003
Figure imgf000069_0001
20 114
Same procedure as imidazoles 101.
Figure imgf000069_0002
21 115
Same procedure as imidazoles 101.
Figure imgf000070_0001
Figure imgf000070_0002
Figure imgf000071_0003
Method 3
Figure imgf000071_0001
R, R2
129 (A6)-5 (A6)-6
By allowing a compound of formula (129) (J. Org. Chem., 1995, 60, 8231; J. Org. Chem., 1993, 58, 4785) to react with an aldehyde (R2CHO), a primary amine (R]NH2) and ammonium acetate wherein Rls R2, R and R( are defined as above in formula (A6).
These reactions may be carried out in a solvent such as acetic acid (AcOH) at temperatures ranging from 23 °C to 120°C, for 1 to 60 hours.
Examples
Figure imgf000071_0002
Prepared according to Wasserman et al (J. Org. Chem., 1995, 60, 8231; J. Org. Chem., 1993, 58, 4785). Benzyl (triphenylphosphoranylidene) acetate (130) was purchased from Aldrich chemical company and used directly. Η NMR of 131 (400 MHz, CDC13) δ 1.5 (s, 9H), 4.62 (s, 2H), 6.3 (d, IH), 6.62 (d, 2H), 7.05 (t, 2H), 7.1 (t, IH), 7.38-7.8 (m, 20H). TLC: R/=0.5 (30% ethyl acetate-hexane).
Figure imgf000072_0001
131 132
Prepared according to Wasserman et al (J. Org. Chem., 1995, 60, 8231; J. Org. Chem., 1993, 58, 4785). Η NMR of 132 (400 MHz, CDC13) δ 1.5 (s, 9H), 5.1 (s, 2H), 5.15 (br s, 2H, 2 x H-O), 6.4 (d, IH), 6.95 (d, 2H), 7.1 (t, 2H), 7.18 (t, IH), 7.4 (d, 2H), 7.5 (d, IH), 7.9 (d, 2H). TLC: R/=0.7 (30% ethyl acetate-hexane).
Figure imgf000072_0002
132 133
Η NMR of 133 (400 MHz, CDCI3-CD3OD, 8:1) δ 5 (s, 2H), 6.4 (d IH), 6.9- 7.16 (m, 5H), 7.35 (d, 2H), 7.53 (d, IH), 7.9 (d, 2H).
H
Figure imgf000072_0003
H
134 Prepared according to Brackeen et al (Tetrahedron Letters 1994, 35, 1635). For other approaches to imidazole-4-carboxylates see: a) Nunami et al (J Org. Chem. 1994, 59, 7635). b) Heindel et al (Tetrahedron Letters 1971, 1439). Η NMR of 134 (400 MHz, 8:1 CDCl3-CD3OD) δ 5.2 (s, 2H), 6.4 (d, IH), 7.25 (br s, 5H), 7.5 (d, 2H), 7.6 (d, IH), 7.7 (d, 2H), 8.3 (s, IH).
Method 4
Figure imgf000073_0001
By allowing a compound of formula (129) to react with a polymer bound aldehyde (RiCHO), a primary amine (R2NH2) and ammonium acetate wherein Rh R2, R3 and R4 are defined as above in formula (A6).
This reaction may be carried out on functionalized cross linked polystyrene polymers such as Merrifield resin, Wang resin, Rink resin, Tentagel™ resin, in a solvent such as acetic acid (AcOH) at temperatures ranging from 23 °C to 120°C, for 1 to 60 hours. The product maybe released from the polymer using conditions known to those skilled in the art.
Examples
Figure imgf000073_0002
CHO For leading references see: a) Mathias (Synthesis, 1979, 561). b) Sarantakis et al (Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 1976, 73, 336). c) Hudson et al (Peptide Chemistry 1985 (Kiso, Y., ed.), 1986, Protein Research Foundation, Osaka.), d) Wang (J. Am. Chem. Soc. 1973, 95, 1328). e) Lu et al (J. Org. Chem. 1981, 46, 3433). To 6mmol (lequiv) of Wang resin in 130mL of dry dimethylformamide was added 18mmol (3equiv) of diisopropylcarbodiimide and the mixture was sonnicated for 4 hours (final bath temperature was 37°C). 4-Formylcinnamic acid (lδmmol, 3equiv) and 4-dimethylaminopyridine (όmmol, lequiv) were added and the mixture was magnetically stirred for 48 hours at ambient temperature. The resin was filtered and thoroughly washed with dimethylforamide (500mL), methanol (500mL), dichloromethane (500mL) and methanol (500mL) and dried in vacuo (O.lmmHg) for 24 hours. A coupling yield of 80%> was established by cleaving lOOmg of the resin with a solution of 20%> trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane for 20min at ambient temperature.
Figure imgf000074_0001
C02H
To 60mg (0.048mmol, l .Oequiv) of 135 was added 40mg (0.097mmol, 2.0equiv) of 132 followed by 37mg (0.481mmol, 5.0equiv) of ammonium acetate and 0.2mL of acetic acid. The mixture was heated to 100°C for 15 hours, filtered, washed with dimethylformamide, dichloromethane, methanol and dichloromethane. The crude product was isolated by treatment of the polymer with a solution of 50% trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane for 1 hour at 23 °C. The solvent was removed and the residue was purified by preparative thin layer chromatography (20% methanol-dichloromethane eluent). Η NMR of 136 (400 MHz, CD3OD) δ 5.15 (s, 2H), 6.48 (d, IH), 6.55 (d, IH), 7.25 (br s, 4H), 7.5-7.8 (m, 9H), 8.1 (d, IH). MS (ESI negative ion) [M-H]-: 493;
Method 5
Figure imgf000075_0001
By allowing a primary amine (RjNH2), a carboxylic acid (R2CO2H) and a ketoaldehyde (R COCHO) to react with a polymer bound isocyanide (R3NC) and by subsequently cyclizing compound 137 with ammonium acetate wherein Rl s R2, R3 and 4 are defined as above in formula (A6).
The first step in this reaction may be carried out on functionalized cross linked polystyrene resins such as Merrifield resin, Wang resin, Rink resin, Tentagel™ resin, in a solvent or a combination of solvents such as dichloromethane (CH2C12), chloroform (CHC1 ), methanol (MeOH), tetrahydrofuran (THF) or acetonitrile (CH3CN), in the presence or absence of a catalyst (e.g. ZnCl2, MgBr2) at temperatures ranging from -78°C to 80°C, for 1 to 60 hours. The second step in this reaction may be carried out in a solvent such as acetic acid (AcOH) at temperatures ranging from 23°C to 120°C, for 1 to 60 hours.
Figure imgf000076_0001
Ar = 2-naphthyl, 3,4-dichlorophenyl, R = CH3, CF3, N02, CH30, 2,5-dimethoxyphenyl, and CF30, F, Cl, Br, Ph
Prepared according to Gunn et al (J. Org. Chem. 1977, 42, 754).
Figure imgf000076_0002
Prepared according to Zhang et al (Tetrahedron Letters 1996, 37, 751).
Figure imgf000076_0003
Prepared according to Zhang et al (Tetrahedron Letters 1996, 37, 751). 'H NMR of mono tert-butyl ester of 140 (400 MHz, CDC13) δ 1.1 (m,2H), 1.2 (d,3H), 1.3 (m,2H), 1.5 (s,9H), 1.56 (m,2H), 2.2 (m,2H), 2.9 (m,lH), 3.1 (m,lH), 3.2 (m,lH), 3.8 (s,3H), 4.6 (m,2H), 6.1 (d,lH), 6.9 (t,4H), 7.1 (m,5H), 7.4 (d, 2H), 7.6 (d,lH). Method 6
RjCOjH + R2COCHO + R3NC
Figure imgf000077_0001
By allowing a carboxylic acid (RιCO2H) to react with an isocyanide (R3NC) and a ketoaldehyde (R2COCHO) and by allowing compound 141 to cyclize in the presence of ammonium acetate, wherein Rj, R2, and R3 are defined as above in formula (A6).
The first step in this reaction reaction may be carried out in a solvent or a combination of solvents such as dichloromethane (CH2C12), chloroform (CHC13), methanol (MeOH), tetrahydrofuran (THF), acetonitrile (CH3CN), in the presence or absence of a catalyst (e.g. ZnCl2, MgBr2) at temperatures ranging from -78°C to 80°C, for 1 to 60 hours. The second step in this reaction may be carried out in a solvent such as acetic acid (AcOH) at temperatures ranging from 23 °C to 120°C, for 1 to 60 hours.
Examples
Figure imgf000077_0002
142 143
Prepared according to Bossio et al (Liebigs Ann. Chem. 1991, 1107). To an ethyl ether mixture of the carboxylic acid and ketoaldehyde at 0°C was added dropwise an ethyl ether solution of the isocyanide. The mixture was warmed to 25°C and stirred for 2 hours to 3 days. The solution was diluted with ethyl acetate, washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate and dried over sodium sulfate. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the residue was purified by silica gel chromatography to yield α-Acyloxy-β-ketoamide 142.
A solution of the α-Acyloxy-β-ketoamide 142 (1 equiv) and ammonium acetate (30 equiv) in acetic acid was heated at 100°C for 2 to 15 hours. The reaction was cooled to 23 °C, diluted with ethyl acetate, washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate and dried over sodium sulfate. Solvent was removed in vacuo and the crude mixture was sepaprated by silica gel chromatography to provide imidazole 143.
Figure imgf000078_0001
Η NMR of 144 (400 MHz, d6-acetone) δ 0.85 (t, 3H), 1.2-1.6 (m, 4H), 3.3 (m, 2H), 6.55 (s, IH), 6.62 (d, IH), 7.3 (t, 2H), 7.7 (d, IH), 7.82 (d, 2H),
8.1 (d, 2H), 8.25 (dd, 2H).
Figure imgf000079_0001
Η NMR of 146 (400 MHz, d6-acetone) δ 0.9 (t, 3H), 1.4 (m, 2H), 1.6 (m, 2H), 3.35 (m, 2H), 6.58 (d, IH), 7.12 (t, 2H), 7.65 (d, IH), 7.78 (d, 2H), 8.1 (s br, IH), 8.05 (m, IH), 8.2 (d, 2H).
General method for the synthesis of compounds (A7)
R1C02H + R2COCHO + R3NC
Figure imgf000079_0002
141 (A7)
By allowing a carboxylic acid (RιCO2H) to react with an isocyanide (R3NC) and a ketoaldehyde (R2COCHO) wherein Ri, R2, and R3 are defined as above in formula (A7) and by allowing compound 141 to cyclize in the presence of ammonium acetate.
The first step in this reaction reaction may be carried out in a solvent or a combination of solvents such as dichloromethane (CH2C12), chloroform (CHC13), methanol (MeOH), tetrahydrofuran (THF), acetonitrile (CH3CN), in the presence or absence of a catalyst (e.g. ZnCl , MgBr2) at temperatures ranging from -78°C to 80°C, for 1 to 60 hours. The second step in this reaction may be carried out in a solvent such as acetic acid (AcOH) at temperatures ranging from 23 °C to 120°C, for 1 to 60 hours.
Examples
Figure imgf000080_0001
141 147
Prepared according to Bossio et al (Liebigs Ann. Chem. 1991, 1107).
A solution of the α-Acyloxy-β-ketoamide 141 (1 equiv) and ammonium acetate (2 equiv) in acetic acid was heated at 100°C for 2 to 15 hours. The reaction was cooled to 23 °C, diluted with ethyl acetate, washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate and dried over sodium sulfate. Solvent was removed in vacuo and the crude oxazole 147 was purified by silica gel chromatography.
Figure imgf000081_0001
'H NMR of 148 (400 MHz, de-acetone) δ 0.9 (t, 3H), 1.4 (m, 2H), 1.6 (m, 2H), 3.42 (m, 2H), 6.63 (d, IH), 7.2 (t, 2H), 7.7 (d, IH), 7.9 (d, 2H), 8.18 (s br, IH), 8.25 (d, 2H), 8.6 (m, IH).
General methods for the synthesis of compounds (A8) and (A9) Method 1
Figure imgf000081_0002
(A8)-l (A8)-2
By allowing a compound of formula (A5) to react with compound of formula
(149) wherein Rb R2, R3, j, R5, and Rf, are defined as above in formula (A8).
These reactions may be carried out in a solvent or a combination of solvents such as dioxane or acetic acid (AcOH) at temperatures ranging from 23°C to 120°C, for 1 to 60 hours. Examples
Figure imgf000082_0001
A solution of O.lmmol of diamine 150 and O.lmmol of 6 in 1.2mL of 1,4- dioxane-acetic acid (5:1) was heated at 100°C. Upon completion of the reaction as judged by thin layer chromatography, ethyl acetate was added and the organic layer was washed with water, 0.5M citric acid, 10% sodium bicarbonate and dried over sodium sulfate. The compounds were purified using silica gel chromatography.
Figure imgf000082_0002
TABLE 7.
Figure imgf000082_0003
152 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 6.5 (d, 2H), 7.3 (s, IH), 7.4-7.8 (m, 10H), 7.9 (s, IH),
8.05 (d, IH). MS ESI (pos ion) for [M+H]+: 468 (calculated 467).
153 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 6.48 (d, 2H), 7.5 (dd, 8H), 7.6 (d, 2H), 8.24 (s, 2H). MS
ESI (pos ion) for [M+H]+: 491, 492 (calculated 490, 491).
154 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 3.3 (s, 3H), 6.5 (d, 2H), 7.59 (s, 8H), 7.62 (d, 2H),
8.3 (d, IH), 8.55 (d, IH), 8.95 (s, IH). MS ESI (pos ion) for [M+H]+: 437 (calculated 436).
155 (400MHz, d6-DMSO) δ 6.56 (d, 2H), 7.5 (m, 6H), 7.65 (d, 4H), 8.2 (d, IH),
8.3 (d, IH), 8.6 (s, IH). MS ESI (neg ion) for [M-H]": 465 (calculated 466).
156 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 6.56 (d, 2H), 7.5 (s br, 8H), 7.65 (d, 2H), 8.2 (d, IH),
8.3 (d, IH), 8.7 (s, IH). MS ESI (neg ion) for [M-H]": 479 (calculated 480).
157 (400MHz, d6-DMSO) δ 6.52 (d, 2H), 7.54-8.16 (m, 14H).
Method 2
Figure imgf000083_0001
(A9)-l (A9)-2 By allowing a compound of formula (A5) to react with compound of formula (158) wherein Rb R2, R3, P , R5 are defined as above in formula (A9).
These reactions may be carried out in a solvent or a combination of solvents such as dioxane or acetic acid (AcOH) at temperatures ranging from 23 °C to 120°C, for 1 to 60 hours.
Examples
Figure imgf000084_0001
'H NMR of 160 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 6.5 (d, 2H), 7.5-7.7 (m, 12H),
7.95 (m, IH), 8.65 (d, IH), 9.15 (s, IH).
MS ESI (pos ion) for [M+H]+: 424 (calculated 423).
General method for the synthesis of compounds (AlO)
Figure imgf000084_0002
OH OCOR,
(AlO)-l (A10)-3
By allowing a compound of formula (AlO)-l prepared as above to react with a carboxylic acid (R CO2H) wherein R] and R2 are defined as above in formula (AlO). These reactions may be carried out in a solvent such as tetrahydrofuran (THF), dichloromethane (CH2C12), in the presence of diisopropyl carbodiimide (DIC) and a base (e.g. 4,4-dimethylaminopyridine) at temperatures ranging from 0°C to 23°C, for 1 to 60 hours.
Examples
Figure imgf000085_0001
To 50mg of diol 22 in lmL of dichloromethane was added diisopropyl carbodiimide (2.2 equiv) and the reaction was stirred for 1 hour at 23 °C. To the solution was added 4,4-dimethylaminopyridine (0.2 equiv) followed by para- methoxybenzoic acid (2.2 equiv) in 5mL of tetrahydrofuran and the mixture was stirred for an additional 3 hours at 23 °C. The reaction was diluted with ethyl acetate and washed with IN HCl, saturated sodium bicarbonate and the organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate. The crude mixture was purified using radial chromatography (ethyl acetate-hexane eluent). Η NMR of 161 (400MHz, CDC13) δ 1.5 (s, 18H), 3.8 (s, 6H), 6.25 (d, 2H), 6.32 (s, 2H), 6.85 (d, 4H), 7.18 (d, 4H), 7.31 (d, 4H), 7.45 (d, 2H), 7.95 (d, 4H).
Figure imgf000086_0001
lU NMR of 162 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 3.8 (s, 6H), 6.4 (m, 4H), 6.95 (d, 4H), 7.38 (d, 4H), 7.5 (d, 4H), 7.6 (d, 2H), 7.95 (d, 4H). MS ESI (neg ion) for [M-H]": 621 (calculated 622).
General method for the synthesis of compounds (All)
Figure imgf000086_0002
(All)
By allowing a compound of formula (AlO)-l prepared as above to react with a sulfonyl chloride (R2SO2Cl), and subsequently by oxidizing intermediate 163 and by allowing intermediate 164 to react with a thioamide (R C(S)NH2) wherein Ri, R2 and R3 are defined as above in formula (Al l).
The first step in this sequence of reactions may be carried out in a solvent such as tetrahydrofuran (THF), dichloromethane (CH2C12), in the presence of a base (e.g. 4,4-dimethylaminopyridine, triethylamine, triisopropylamine) and a sulfonyl chloride (e.g. tosyl chloride, mesyl chloride), at temperatures ranging from -20°C to 23°C, for 1 to 60 hours. The second step in this sequence of reactions may be carried out in a solvent such as dichloromethane (CH2C12), in the presence of an oxidizing reagent (e.g. tetrapropylammonium perruthenate (VII) (TPAP)) and activated 4A molecular sieves at temperatures ranging from 0°C to 23°C, for 1 to 60 hours. The third step in this sequence of reactions may be carried out in a solvent such as acetic acid, toluene, dioxane at temperatures ranging from 0°C to 120°C, for 1 to 60 hours.
Examples
Figure imgf000087_0001
To 50mg of diol 22 in lmL of dichloromethane was added Tosyl chloride (42.5 mg), 4,4-dimethylaminopyridine (6mg), triethylamine (95μl), and the reaction was stirred for 12 hours at 23°C. The volatiles were removed in vacuo and the crude mixture (containing 165, the bis-tosylated compound and the corresponding epoxide) was separated by flash chromatography (ethyl acetate-hexane eluent) to give a mixture of 165 and the corresponding bis-tosylated compound (27mg total).
Figure imgf000087_0002
The mixture consisting of 165 and the corresponding bis-tosylated compound was oxidized as described above for compound 24. The crude mixture was purified by flash chromatography (ethyl acetate-hexane eluent) to give3.9mg of 166 and 16mg of the corresponding bis-tosylate. Η NMR of 166 (400MHz, d6-acetone) δ 1.5 (d, 18H), 2.4 (s, 3H), 6.4 (d, IH), 6.5 (d, IH), 6.95 (s, IH), 7.35 (d, 2H), 7.42 (d, 2H), 7.5 (d, IH), 7.6 (m, 3H), 7.7 (dd, 4H), 8 (d, 2H).
Figure imgf000088_0001
To 3.9mg of 166 was added 3mg of para-methoxythiobenzamide and 0.5ml of toluene and the reaction was heated at 65°C for 12 hours. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the crude mixture was purified by flash chromatography (ethyl acetate- hexane eluent) to givel .8mg of 167. Η NMR of 167 (400MHz, CDC13) δ 1.5 (d, 18H), 3.8 (s, 3H), 6.3 (dd, 2H), 6.9 (d, 2H), 7.35 (d, 2H), 7.4 (m, 4H), 7.55 (m, 4H), 7.9 (d, 2H).
Figure imgf000089_0001
Η NMR of 168 (400MHz, CD3OD) δ 3.8 (s, 3H), 6.45 (dd, 2H), 7.0 (d, 2H), 7.4 (d, 2H), 7.5-7.7 (m, 8H), 7.9 (d, 2H).
Biological Protocols
PTP-IB Gene Cloning and Protein Purification
The following procedure was conducted for recombinant production and purification of protein tyrosine phosphatase PTP-IB, for use as a substrate in PTPase inhibition assays. A. Production of a PTP-IB cDNA
A human placental cDNA library was synthesized in a 50 ul reaction containing 1 ug human placental poly(A)+ mRNA (Clontech, Palo Alto, CA), 4 ul random hexamer primers, 8 ul of lOmM dNTPs (Pharmacia, Piscataway NJ), lul (200 U/ul) Moloney murine leukemia virus reverse transcriptase (Gibco-BRL, Canada), 0.5 ul (26 U/ul) RNAsin (Promega, Madison WI), and 12 ul 5x buffer (Gibco-BRL). The synthesis reaction was incubated at 37°C for one hour and then heat inactivated at 95°C for five minutes.
A PTP-IB cDNA was amplified, using polymerase chain reaction (PCR), from the cDNAs synthesized as described above. More particularly, based on the published sequence of PTB- IB, two PCR primers were synthesized to amplify a portion of the PTP-IB coding sequence known to encode a 321 amino acid fragment containing the PTP-IB catalytic domain and having PTPase activity. See Hoppe et al., Eur. J. Biochem., 225. 1069-77 (1994); Barford, D., et al, J. Molec. Biol, 239:726-730 (1994); Chernoff et al. , Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 57:2735-2739 (1990); Charbonneau et al. Proc Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, <°6';5252-5256 (1989). The primers had the following respective sequences:
PTP-1B-A(5') (SEQ ID NO: l)
5* CGCACTGGATCCTCATGGAGATGGAAAAGG 3*
PTP-1B-B(3*) (SEQ ID NO: 2)
5' CTCCCTGAATTCCTAATTGTGTGGCTCCAGG 3'
The first primer, which hybridizes to the non-coding strand, corresponds to the 5' portion of the PTP-IB coding sequence and encodes a BamH I restriction site upstream of the initiation codon, to facilitate cloning. The second primer, which hybridizes to the coding strand, corresponds to the 3' portion of the PTB- IB fragment of interest, and encodes a stop codon and an EcoR I restriction site downstream from the stop codon.
A 100 μl PCR reaction mixture containing approx. 1 ug of the human placental cDNA library, 0.2 mM of each dNTP, 30 uM of each primer, lx Amplitaq DNA polymerase buffer (Perkin-Elmer, Norwalk CT), and 5 units Amplitaq DNA polymerase (Perkin-Elmer) was denatured at 94°C for 5 minutes and then subjected to 25 cycles of amplification as follows: 1) 94°C denaturation for 1 minute; 2) 55°C annealing for 1 minute; and 3) 72°C primer extension for 1 minute.
The PCR reaction product (992 bp) was digested with BamH I and EcoR I (New England Biolabs, Beverly MA) to yield a 975 bp product encoding the 321 amino acid PTP-IB protein fragment, and having "sticky ends" to facilitate cloning. B. Production of a PTP-IB expression vector.
The 975 bp PTP-IB partial cDNA was purified by agarose gel electrophoresis and ligated into a BamH HEcoR I-digested pGEX-3X plasmid vector (Pharmacia, Piscataway, NJ). The pGEX vector is designed to produce a fusion of glutathione-S- transferase (GST) to a protein encoded by another DNA fragment inserted into the vector's cloning site. Complete sequencing of the insert of the resultant plasmid, designated pGEX-3X-PTP-lB, confirmed the identity of the PTP-IB cDNA, and insertion in the proper orientation and reading frame.
C. Expression and Purification of GST/PTP1B fusion protein.
E. coli strain DH5α (Gibco-BRL) was transformed with plasmid pGEX-3X-
PTP-1B following the supplier's transformation protocol and grown at 37°C with vigorous shaking in Luria-Bertani broth supplemented with 100 ug/ml ampicillin. When the cultures reached an O.D.600 of 0.7-1, production of the GST/PTP-IB fusion protein was induced with 0.1 mM IPTG (Isopropyl b-D-Thiogalactoside). After 3 additional hours of culturing at 37 C, the bacteria were pelleted by centrifugation.
The bacterial pellet was resuspended in lOx (w/v) lysis buffer consisting of 12.5 mM HEPES, 2 mM EDTA, pH 7.0, 15 mM b-mercaptoethanol (bME) and 1 mM PMSF. The lysate was sonicated (on ice) until slight clearing was observed (approx. three min.) and then centrifuged at 10,000 revolutions per minute (RPM) for 10 min. The supernatant was diluted 1 :4 with buffer A (25 mM HEPES, pH 7.0, and 15 mM bME).
Primary purification was achieved using a 5 ml Hi-Trap pre-packed Q column (Pharmacia). After loading the diluted supernatant onto the column, the column was washed with 10 bed volumes of buffer A. The GST/PTP-IB fusion protein was then eluted using a linear gradient of Buffer A and Buffer B (buffer A + 1 M NaCl). Eluted fractions containing protein were identified by SDS-PAGE and Coomassie Blue staining (Pharmacia PhastSystem), and fractions containing PTP-IB activity were identified using the PTP-IB activity assay described below. Elution of the fusion protein occurred at about 30% Buffer B. Fractions containing PTPase activity were pooled, diluted 1 :4 with NET buffer (20 mM Tris, pH 8.8, 100 mM NaCl, 1 mM EDTA and 15 mM bME), and loaded onto a 10 ml GST-Sepharose 4B column (Pharmacia). After loading, the column was washed first with 3 bed volumes of NET buffer + 1%> NP40 (Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, MO), then with NET buffer until O.D. at 280 nm was basal. The GST/PTP-IB fusion protein was eluted from the column using 10 mM glutathione in 33 mM Tris, pH 8.0. Elution of proteins was monitored at O.D.280 and fractions were assayed for activity and run on SDS-PAGE as described above. PTP-IB fusion protein eluted after approx. 4-5 minutes (flow rate lml/min.).
The GST/PTP- IB-containing fractions from the GST-Sepharose 4B purification were pooled, concentrated into a final storage buffer (0.2 M NaCl, 25 mM HEPES, 1 mM EDTA, and 5 mM DTT, pH 7.0) using a 1 ml Hi-Trap Q column (pre-packed, Pharmacia), and stored at -80°C (final concentration of 0.52 mg/ml). The foregoing procedure yielded approximately 5mg of PTP-IB fusion protein per 500 ml of cultured cells, purified to substantial homogeneity as assessed by SDS- PAGE.
Assay of PTP-IB Activity.
PTP-IB enzymatic activity of samples was assayed in microtiter plates as follows.
The protein concentration of the PTP-IB enzyme preparation was determined using the Bio-Rad Protein Assay kit (Bio-Rad, Hercules CA). An aliquot from each sample was taken and diluted to 2 mg protein/ml using activity assay buffer (100 mM Sodium Acetate, pH 6.0, 1 mM EDTA, 0.1% TX-100 (International Biotechnologies, Inc.) and 15 mM bME) to form a PTP-IB stock solution.
A 100 ul reaction mixture was prepared containing 10 ul of the PTP-IB stock solution, 10 ul of 9 mM p-nitrophenylphosphate ((pNPP), Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis MO), and 80 ul of activity assay buffer (100 mM sodium acetate, pH 6.0, 1 mM EDTA, 0.1%) Triton X-100, 15 mM bME). Reactions were mixed gently and incubated at 37°C for 60 minutes. Enzymatic cleavage of phosphate from pNPP (a tyrosine phosphate analog) is marked by a colorimetric change in this substrate. See, e.g., Imbert et al, Biochem J., 297. 163-173 (1994); Ghosh and Miller, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm., 194:36-44 (1993); Zanke et al, Eur. J. Immunol, 22:235-39 (1992).
Reactions were stopped by addition of 10 ul of a 0.5 M NaOH/50% EtOH solution. To determine the enzymatic activity, absorbance readings of the reactions were measured at 405 nm using a Molecular Devices Thermomax Plate Reader (Menlo Park CA).
CD45 Gene Cloning and Protein Purification
The following procedure was conducted for recombinant production and purification of protein tyrosine phosphatase CD45, for use as a substrate in PTPase inhibition assays.
A. Production of aCD45 cDNA, and production of a CD45 expression vector.
A human cDNA library was synthesized from RNA isolated from the human Jurkat cell line, as described above for PTP-IB
CD45 cDNA was amplified, using polymerase chain reaction (PCR), from the cDNAs synthesized above. Two PCR primers were synthesized to amplify the coding sequence of CD45. The primers had the following respective sequences:
CD45 (5') (SEQ ID NO: 3)
5' CTACATCCCGGGATGTCCTGCAATTTAGATG 3'
CD45 (3') (SEQ ID NO: 4)
5' CATTTATGTCCCGGGCTATGAACCTTGAT 3'
The first primer corresponds to the 5' portion of the CD45 coding sequence and encodes a Sma I restriction site upstream of the initiation codon, to facilitate cloning. The second primer corresponds to the 3' portion of the CD45 sequence, and encodes a stop codon and a Sma I restriction site downstream from the stop codon.
The PCR reaction product (2127 bp) was digested with Sma I (New England Biolabs, Beverly MA) to yield a 2110 bp product. The pET24C plasmid vector (Novagen, Inc., Madison WI) was digested with the BamH I restriction enzyme, and the "sticky" ends were filled using T4 DNA polymerase according to the manufacturer's instructions (New England Biolabs, Beverly MA); the resulting plasmid DNA was ligated to Sma /-digested CD45 PCR product. The pET24C vector is designed to produce high levels of the protein encoded by cDNA inserted into the vector's cloning site (CD45), in bacterial hosts. Complete sequencing of the insert of the resultant plasmid, designated pET24C-CD45, confirmed the identity of the CD45 cDNA, and insertion in the proper orientation and reading frame.
C. Expression and Purification of CD45 protein.
E. coli strain DH5 (Gibco-BRL) was transformed with pET24C-CD45 following the supplier's transformation protocol, plated onto Luria-Bertani agar plates supplemented with 30 ug/ml kanamycin and grown overnight at 37°C. A single bacterial colony was transferred into 50 mis Luria-Bertani broth supplemented with 30 ug/ml kanamycin and grown overnight with vigorous shaking. This overnight culture was split into two equal parts, and added to 2L Luria-Bertani broth supplemented with 50 ug/ml kanamycin. When the cultures reached an O.D. oo of 1, production of the recombinant CD45 protein was induced with 0.1 mM IPTG (Isopropyl b-D-Thiogalactoside). After 5 additional hours of culturing at 37°C, the bacteria were pelleted by centrifugation.
The bacterial pellet (approximately 5 grams) was resuspended in lOx (w/v) lysis buffer consisting of 12.5 mM HEPES, 2 mM EDTA, pH 7.0, 15 mM bME and 1 mM PMSF. The lysate was sonicated (on ice) until slight clearing was observed (approx. three min.) and then centrifuged at 10,000 revolutions per minute (RPM) for 10 min. The supernatant was filtered through 1mm Wattman filter paper, and 9.7 grams (i.e., 194 grams/L) of ammonium sulfate were added to the solution on ice to precipitate soluble proteins. After a 1 hour incubation on ice, the lysate was spun at 10,000 RPM for 30 min. at 4 C; supernatant was removed, and an additional 7.6 grams (i.e., 151 grams/L) of ammonium sulfate were added. The resulting pellet was resuspended in 3 mis of buffer B (33 mM imidazole-HCl pH 8.0, 2mM EDTA, 10 mM bME, 0.002% PMSF) and stored on ice. After another 1 hour incubation on ice, the spin supernatant with ammonium sulfate was spun again at 10,000 RPM for 30 mins at 4 C. The resulting pellet from the second centrifugation was resuspended in 2 mis of buffer B. The two pellet solutions were pooled and dialyzed overnight against buffer B.
Secondary purification was achieved using a Mono-Q column. (Pharmacia). After loading the diluted supernatant onto the column, the column was washed with 10 bed volumes of buffer B. The recombinant CD45 protein was then eluted using a linear gradient of Buffer B and Buffer C (buffer B + 1 M NaCl). Eluted fractions containing protein were identified by SDS-PAGE and Coomassie Blue staining (Pharmacia PhastSystem), and fractions containing CD45 activity were identified using the CD45 activity assay described below.
The CD45-containing fractions from the MonoQ column purification were pooled and stored at 4 C.
Assay of CD45 Activity.
CD45 enzymatic activity of samples was assayed in microtiter plates as follows.
A 100 ul reaction mixture was prepared containing 10 ul of the CD45 stock solution, 10 ul of 9.3 mM p-nitrophenylphosphate ((pNPP), Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis MO), and 80 ul of activity assay buffer (100 mM sodium acetate, pH 6.0, 1 mM EDTA, 0.1%) Triton X-100, 15 mM bME). Reactions were mixed gently and incubated at 37°C for 60 minutes. Reactions were stopped by addition of 10 ul of a 0.5 M NaOH/50% EtOH solution. To determine the enzymatic activity, absorbance readings of the reactions were measured at 405 nm using a Molecular Devices Thermomax Plate Reader (Menlo Park CA). In vitro PTPase Inhibition Assay
The ability of the compounds of the present invention, such as the cinnamic acid derivative compounds of Example 2, to inhibit the PTPase activity of PTP-IB, CD45, PTP-IC, and PTPα was determined using modifications of the PTP-IB and CD45 activity assays described in Examples 3 and 4.
First, 0.001 mmol of the cinnamic acid derivative (or other PTPase inhibitor compound) was dissolved in 100 ul of DMSO to create a 10 mM stock solution. The 10 mM stock solution was used to add varying concentrations (100 uM, 33 uM, 10 uM, 3 uM, 1 uM, 0.3 uM, 0.1 uM, 0.03 uM, 0.01 uM or 0.003 uM) of the inhibitor compound to a series of otherwise identical PTPase activity assay reactions (100 ul final volume in microtiter wells). Thus, each 100 ul reaction contained 10 ul PTPase enzyme stock solution (final phosphatase concentration of approximately 20 ng/well), 70 ul activity assay buffer, 10 ul pNPP stock solution (final pNPP concentration of .9 mM for PTP-IB assay, 0.93 mM for CD45 assay, 0.5 mM for PTPα assay, and 8 mM for PTP-IC assay), and 10 ul of the diluted inhibitor compound in DMSO. Assay buffers contained: for CD45 and PTP-IB assays, 100 mM sodium acetate at pH 6.0, 1 mM EDTA, 0.1% Triton X-100, and 15 mM bME; for PTP-IC assays, 100 mM sodium acetate at pH 5.5, 0.1% BSA, and 15 mM bME; for PTPα assays, 100 mM sodium acetate at pH 5.25, 0.1 % BSA, and 15 mM bME. Purified phosphatase was added to the reaction mixtures to begin the reactions; the reactions were incubated at 37C for 60 min. (for PTP-IB and CD45 assays) or at 27 C for 60 min. (for PTP-IC and PTPα assays), stopped, and colorimetrically analyzed as described above. As positive and negative controls, reactions were performed containing 10 ul DMSO with no inhibitor compound or containing the known PTPase inhibitors vanadate (final concentration .5 mM; for PTP-IB and CD45 assays) or ammonium molybdate (final concentration 1 mM; for PTP-IC and PTPα assays) substituted for the inhibitor compound of the invention.
The concentration of inhibitor compound required to inhibit 50%> of the PTPase activity (IC50) was determined as follows. First, absorbance readings from the negative control reactions were treated as a baseline and subtracted from the absorbance readings of the experimental reactions. Then, for each reaction, a percent inhibition was calculated using the following formula:
100 X [ 1 - ( O.D.405 reaction / O.D.405 DMSO) ]
For each inhibitor compound tested, an IC50 concentration was calculated from a best-fit computer analysis of the calculated percent inhibition for the various dilutions of the compound.
Inhibitor compounds having an IC50 less than 10 uM (and optimally less than 5uM) for a particular PTPase were scored as highly effective inhibitors of that PTPase enzyme, and are preferred inhibitors of the present invention.
As it will be apparent to those persons skilled in the art, the foregoing biological data is not absolute and will vary according to many factors such as assay conditions and the like.
TABLE 8.
Figure imgf000098_0001
Figure imgf000099_0001
*-: data not available TABLE 10.
Figure imgf000100_0001
*-: data not available TABLE 11.
Figure imgf000100_0002
The compounds of the present invention have asymmetric centers and may occur as racemates, racemic mixtures, and as individual enantiomers or diastereoisomers, with all isomeric forms being included in the present invention as well as mixtures thereof.
Pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the compounds of Formula (Al) thru (Al l) where a basic or acidic group is present in the structure, are also included within the scope of this invention. When an acidic substituent is present, such as - COOH5 there can be formed the ammonium, sodium, potassium, calcium salt, and the like, for use as the dosage form. When a basic group is present, such as amino or a basic heteroaryl radical, such as pyridyl, an acidic salt, such as hydrochloride, hydrobromide, acetate, maleate, pamoate, methanesulfonate, p-toluenesulfonate, and the like, can be used as the dosage form.
Also, in the case of the -COOH being present, pharmaceutically acceptable esters can be employed, e.g., methyl, tert-butyl, pivaloyloxymethyl, and the like, and those esters known in the art for modifying solubility or hydrolysis characteristics for use as sustained release or prodrug formulations.
In addition, some of the compounds of the instant invention may form solvates with water or common organic solvents. Such solvates are encompassed within the scope of the invention.
The term "therapeutically effective amount" shall mean that amount of drug or pharmaceutical agent that will elicit the biological or medical response of a tissue, system, animal, or human that is being sought by a researcher, veterinarian, medical doctor or other clinician. Generally, a daily dose of about 0.5mg/Kg to lOOmg/Kg body weight in divided doses is suggested to treat PTPase related diseases. Such dosage has to be individualized by the clinician.
The present invention also has the objective of providing suitable topical, oral, and parenteral pharmaceutical formulations for use in the novel methods of treatment of the present invention. The compounds of the present invention may be administered orally as tablets, aqueous or oily suspensions, lozenges, troches, powders, granules, emulsions, capsules, syrups or elixirs. The composition for oral use may contain one or more agents selected from the group of sweetening agents, flavouring agents, colouring agents and preserving agents in order to produce pharmaceutically elegant and palatable preparations. The tablets contain the acting ingredient in admixture with non-toxic pharmaceutically acceptable excipients which are suitable for the manufacture of tablets. These excipients may be, for example, (1) inert diluents , such as calcium carbonate, lactose, calcium phosphate or sodium phosphate; (2) granulating and disintegrating agents, such as corn starch or alginic acid; (3) binding agents, such as starch, gelatin or acacia; and (4) lubricating agents, such as magnesium stearate, stearic acid or talc. These tablets may be uncoated or coated by known techniques to delay disintegration and absorption in the gastrointestinal tract and thereby provide a sustained action over a longer period. For example, a time delay material such as glyceryl monostearate or glyceryl distearate may be employed. Coating may also be performed using techniques described in the U.S. Patent Nos. 4,256,108; 4,160,452; and 4,265,874 to form osmotic therapeutic tablets for control release.
Formulations for oral use may be in the form of hard gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with an inert solid diluent, for example, calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate or kaolin. They may also be in the form of soft gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with water or an oil medium, such as peanut oil, liquid paraffin or olive oil.
Aqueous suspensions normally contain the active materials in admixture with excipients suitable for the manufacture of aqueous suspension. Such expicients may be: (1) suspending agent such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, methyl cellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, sodium alginate, polyvinylpyrrolidone, gum tragacanth and gum acacia;
(2) dispersing or wetting agents which may be (a) naturally occurring phosphatide such as lecithin; (b) a condensation product of an alkylene oxide with a fatty acid, for example, polyoxyethylene stearate; (c) a condensation product of ethylene oxide with a long chain aliphatic alcohol, for example, heptadecaethylenoxycetanol; (d) a condensation product of ethylene oxide with a partial ester derived from a fatty acid and hexitol such as polyoxyethylene sorbitol monooleate, or (e) a condensation product of ethylene oxide with a partial ester derived from fatty acids and hexitol anhydrides, for example polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate.
The pharmaceutical compositions may be in the form of a sterile injectable aqueous or oleagenous suspension. This suspension may be formulated according to known methods using those suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents which have been mentioned above. The sterile injectable preparation may also a sterile injectable solution or suspension in a non-toxic parenterally-acceptable diluent or solvent, for example, as a solution in 1,3-butanediol. Among the acceptable vehicles and solvents that may be employed are water, Ringer's solution, and isotonic sodium chloride solution. In addition, sterile, fixed oils are conventionally employed as a solvent or suspending medium. For this purpose, any bland fixed oil may be employed including synthetic mono- or diglycerides. In addition, fatty acids such as oleic acid find use in the preparation of injectables.
Compounds of Formula (Al) thru (Al 1) may also be administered in the form of suppositories for rectal administration of the drug. These compositions can be prepared by mixing the drug with a suitable non-irritating excipient which is solid at ordinary temperature but liquid at the rectal temperature and will therefore melt in the rectum to release the drug. Such materials are cocoa butter and polyethylene glycols.
The compounds of the present invention may also be administered in the form of liposome delivery systems, such as small unilamellar vesicles, large unilamellar vesicles, and multilamellar vesicles. Liposomes can be formed from a variety of phospholipids, such as cholesterol, stearylamine, or phosphatidylcholines.
For topical use, creams, ointments, jellies, solutions or suspensions, etc., containing the compounds of Formula (Al) thru (Al 1) are employed. REFERENCES
1) Tonks et al, J. Biol. Chem., 263(14):6722-30 (1988).
2) Hunter, Cell, 80:225-236 (1995). 3) Cohen, Trends Biochem. Sci., 17:408-413 (1992).
4) Shenolikar, Ann. Rev. Cell Biol, 10:55-86 (1994).
5) Bollen et a/., Crit. Rev. Biochem. Mol. Biol, 27:227-81 (1992).
6) MacKintosh and MacKintosh, TIBS, 79:444-448 (1994).
7) Fisher et al, Science, 255:401-406 (1991). 8) Hunter and Cooper, Ann. Rev. Biochem., 54:897-930 (1985).
9) Tonks and Neel, Cell 57:365-368.
10) Brady-Kalnay and Tonks, Curr. Opin. Cell Biol. 7:650-657 (1995).
11) Streuli, Curr. Opin. Cell. Biol. 5:182-188 (1996).
12) Volberg et al, The EMBO J. 77:1733-1742 (1992). 13) Bennett et al, J. Cell Sci. 106:891-901 (1993).
14) Serra-Pages et al, The EMBO J. 14:2827-2838 (1995).
15) Pulido et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 92:11686-11690 (1995).
16) Cowin, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 91: 10759- 10761 (1994).
17) Kinch et al, J. Cell. Biol. 130:461-471 (1995). 18) Behrens et al, J. Cell. Biol. 120:757-766 (1993).
19) Matsuyoshi et al, J. Cell. Biol. 775:703-714 (1992).
20) Brady-Kalnay et al, J. Cell. Biol. 130:977-986 (1995).
21) Fuchs et al, J. Biol. Chem. 277:16712-16719 (1996).
22) Brady-Kalnay et al, J. Cell. Biol. 722:961-972 (1993). 23) Gebbink et al, J. Biol. Chem. 2(55:16101-16104 (1993).
24) Sap et al, Mol. Cell. Biol. 14:1-9 (1994).
25) Peles et al, Cell 52:251-260 (1995).
26) Barnea et al. J. Biol. Chem. 269:14349-14352 (1994).
27) Maurel et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 97:2512-2516 (1994). 28) Krueger et al. Cell 84:611-622 (1996).
29) Adachi et al, Cell 55:15 (1996). 30) Klingmuller et al, Cell 50:729-738 (1995).
31) de la Chapelle et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 90:4495-4499 (1993).
32) Yi et al, Mol. Cell. Biol. 73:7577-7586 (1993)
33) Shisheva and Shechter, Endocrinology 133:1562-1568 (1993). 34) Fantus, et al, Biochemistry 25:8864-8871 (1989).
35) Kadota, et al, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm. 147:259-266 (1987).
36) Kadota, et al, J. Biol. Chem. 262:8252-8256 (1987).
37) Kulas, et al, J. Biol Chem. 270:2435-2438 (1995).
38) Ahmad et al, J. Biol. Chem. 270:20503-20508 (1995). 39) Moller, et al, J. Biol. Chem. 277:23126-23131 (1995).
40) Kulas et al, J. Biol. Chem. 271:755-760 (1996).
41) Ahmad, et al, J. Clin. Invest. 95:2806-2812 (1995).
42) Trowbridge, Annu. Rev. Immunol. 72:85-116 (1994).
43) Saltiel, Am. J. Physiol. 270:E375-385 (1996). 44) Draznin, Endocrinology 137:2647-2648.
45) Bennett, et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 97:7335-7339 (1994).
46) Case, et al, J. Biol. Chem. 269:10467-10474 (1994).
47) Kharitonenkov, et al, J. Biol. Chem. 270:29189-29193 (1995).
48) Kuhne, et al, J. Biol. Chem. 2(55:11479-11481 (1993). 49) Milarski and Saltiel, J Biol. Chem. 269:21239-21243 (1994).
50) Xiao et al, J. Biol. Chem. 269:21244-21248 (1994).
51) Yamauchi et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 92:664-668 (1995).
52) MacKintosh and MacKintosh, TIBS, 79:444-448 (1994).
53) Weiner et al, J. Natl. Cancer Inst, 56:372-8 (1994). 54) Weiner et al, Am J. Obstet. Gynecol, 770: 1177-883 (1994).
55) Ghosh and Miller, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm. 194:36-44 (1993).
56) Bliska et al, Proc. Natl. Acad Sci. USA, 55:1187-91 (1991).
57) Posner et al, J. Biol. Chem., 269:4596-4604 (1994).
58) Chatterjee et al, "Phosphopeptide substrates and phosphonopeptide inhibitors of protein tyrosine phosphatases," in Peptides: Chemistry and Biology (Rivier and
Smith, Eds.), 1992, Escom Science Publishers: Leiden, Netherlands, pp. 553-55. 59) Burke et al, Biochemistry, 35:6490-94 (1994).
60) Burke et al., Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm. 204(1): 129-134 (1994).
61) Patel et al J Org. Chem., 1977, 42, 3903. 62) J. Am. Chem. Soc, 1991, 773, 9585. 63) J. Am. Chem. Soc, 1989, 777, 314.
64) Mathias Synthesis 1979, 561.
65) Sarantakis et al Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 1976, 73, 336.
66) Hudson et al Peptide Chemistry 1985 (Kiso, Y., ed.), 1986, Protein Research Foundation, Osaka. 67) Wang J. Am. Chem. Soc. 1973, 95, 1328.
68) Lu et al J. Org. Chem. 1981, 46, 3433.
69) Morphy et al Tetrahedron Letters 1996, 37, 3209.
70) Yedidia et al Can. J. Chem. 1980, 55, 1144.
71) Araneo et al Tetrahedron Lett. 1994, 35, 2213. 72) Passerini Gazz. Chim. Ital. 1926, 56, 826.
73) Zhang et al Tetrahedron Letters 1996, 57, 751.
74) Krieg et al Z Naturforsch teil 1967, 22b, 132.
75) Wasserman et al J Org. Chem., 1995, 60, 8231.
76) Wasserman et al J. Org. Chem., 1993, 55, 4785. 77) Brackeen et al Tetrahedron Letters 1994, 35, 1635.
78) Gunn et al J. Org. Chem. 1977, 42, 754.
79) Bossio et al Liebigs Ann. Chem. 1991, 1107.
80) Hoppe et al, Eur. J. Biochem., 225:1069-77 (1994).
81) Barford, D., et al, J. Molec Biol, 259:726-730 (1994). 82) Chernoff et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 57:2735-2739 (1990).
83) Charbonneau et al. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 56:5252-5256 (1989).
84) Imbert et al, Biochem J., 297:163-173 (1994).
85) Ghosh and Miller, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm., 194:36-44 (1993).
86) Zanke et al, Eur. J. Immunol, 22:235-39 (1992).

Claims

What is claimed is:
1. A protein tyrosine phosphatase activity-modulating compound with the structure depicted in Formula (B):
X-C(R')=C(R")COOR" (B) wherein
(i) R and R are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, Cι.π alkyl, optionally substituted arylCI-ualkyl wherein the aryl substituents are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl, hydroxypyronyl, C1-nalkyl, arylCι-nalkyl, Co-11alkyloxyC( ιalkyl, arylCo-πalkyloxyCo-n alkyl, C0-ιιalkylthioC0- πalkyl, ary 1C 0-π alky lthioC0-π alkyl, Co-πalkylaminoCo-u alkyl, ary lC0-π alky laminoC0- πalkyl, di(arylCι-11alkyl)aminoC0-1ιalkyl, C^nalkylcarbonylCo-nalkyl, arylCi. π alky lcarbonylCo-π alkyl, Cj.j ] alky lcarboxyC0-π alkyl, arylC1-πalkylcarboxyC0. πalkyl, CM ! alley lcarbonylaminoC0-11 alkyl, arylCi.iialkylcarbonylaminoCo-ii alkyl, - C0-11alkylCOORι, -C0-1ιalkylCONR2R3 wherein Ri, R2 and R3 are independently selected from hydrogen, C C n alkyl, arylC0-Cπ alkyl, or R2 and R3 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one C C πalkyl, ary 1C0-CH alkyl substituent. (ii) R'" is selected from the group consisting of
(a) hydrogen,
(b) .iialkyl, substituted . πalkyl wherein the substituents are independently selected from halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, carbamoyl, tetrahydrofuryl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl, hydroxypyronyl, C0- ii alkyloxy, arylC0-π alkyloxy, C0-π alkylthio, ary lC0-π alkylthio, C0-πalkylamino, arylCo-nalkylamino, di(arylC0-nalkyl)amino, C! -M alkylcarbonyl, arylCi. ιι alkylcarbonyl, Cj.π alkylcarboxy, arylCi.nalkylcarboxy, Ci.nalkylcarbonylamino, aryl Ci.nalkylcarbonylamino, -C0-nalkylCOOR4, -C0-nalkylCONR5R6 wherein R4, R5 and R^ are independently selected from hydrogen, CrC πalkyl, arylC0-C π alkyl, or R5 and R6 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one CrC n alkyl, arylC0- Cnalkyl substituent,
(c) mono-, di- and tri-substituted arylC0-C πalkyl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above for R and R ,
(iii) X is a mono-, di- or trisubstituted aryl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above for R and R , and aryl is selected from phenyl, biphenyl, naphthyl, dihydronaphthyl, tetrahydronaphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, azulenyl, anthryl, phenanthryl, fluorenyl, pyrenyl, thienyl, benzothienyl, isobenzothienyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzothienyl, furyl, pyranyl, benzofuranyl, isobenzofuranyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzofuranyl, pyrrolyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, indolizinyl, indazolyl, imidazolyl, benzimidazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyradazinyl, pyrimidinyl, triazinyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, 4H-quinolizinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, 1,8-naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, carbazolyl, acridinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, phenoxazinyl, chromanyl, benzodioxolyl, piperonyl, purinyl, hydroxypyronyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, benzthiazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, or thiadiazolyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
2. A compound as defined in claim 1 wherein aryl is selected from phenyl, biphenyl, naphthyl, dihydronaphthyl, tetrahydronaphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, azulenyl, anthryl, phenanthryl, fluorenyl, pyrenyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
3. A compound as defined in claim 1 wherein aryl is selected from thienyl, benzothienyl, isobenzothienyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzothienyl, furyl, pyranyl, benzofuranyl, isobenzofuranyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzofuranyl, pyrrolyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, indolizinyl, indazolyl, imidazolyl, benzimidazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyradazinyl, pyrimidinyl, triazinyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, 4H-quinolizinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, 1,8-naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, carbazolyl, acridinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, phenoxazinyl, chromanyl, benzodioxolyl, piperonyl, purinyl, hydroxypyronyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, benzthiazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
4. A compound as defined in claim 1 wherein aryl is selected from thienyl, benzothienyl, isobenzothienyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzothienyl, phenothiazinyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, benzthiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
5. A compound as defined in claim 1 wherein aryl is selected from furyl, pyranyl, benzofuranyl, isobenzofuranyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzofuranyl, phenoxazinyl, chromanyl, benzodioxolyl, hydroxypyronyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
6. A compound as defined in claim 1 wherein aryl is selected from pyrrolyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, indolizinyl, indazolyl, imidazolyl, benzimidazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyradazinyl, pyrimidinyl, triazinyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, 4H-quinolizinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, 1,8-naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, carbazolyl, acridinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, phenoxazinyl, purinyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, benzthiazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
7. A compound as defined in claim 1 wherein aryl is selected from phenyl, naphthyl, biphenyl, thienyl, benzothienyl, isobenzothienyl, furyl, benzofuranyl, isobenzofuranyl, pyrrolyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, imidazolyl, benzimidazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyradazinyl, pyrimidinyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, phthalazinyl, quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, hydroxypyronyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, benzthiazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
8. A compound as defined in claim 1 wherein aryl is selected from phenyl, naphthyl, biphenyl, thienyl, benzothienyl, furyl, benzofuranyl, pyrrolyl, indolyl, imidazolyl, benzimidazolyl, pyridyl, quinolyl, thiazolyl, benzthiazolyl, oxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
9. A compound as defined in claim 1 wherein aryl is selected from phenyl, naphthyl, biphenyl, thienyl, furyl, pyridyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
10. A compound as defined in claim 1 wherein aryl is phenyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
11. A compound as defined in claim 1 wherein aryl is naphthyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
12. A compound as defined in claim 1 wherein aryl is biphenyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
13. A compound as defined in claim 1 wherein aryl is thienyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
14. A compound as defined in claim 1 wherein aryl is furyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
15. A compound as defined in claim 1 wherein aryl is pyridyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
16. A compound with the structure depicted in Formula (A2):
Figure imgf000111_0001
O
(A2) wherein at least one of R! 5 R and R3 substituents has the general structure depicted in Formula (B)
X-C(R>C(R")COOR" (B)
wherein
(i) R and R are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, C{ .πalkyl, optionally substituted arylC1-πalkyl wherein the aryl substituents are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl, hydroxypyronyl, Cι-πalkyl, arylCi.πalkyl, C0. π alkyloxy C0_π alkyl, arylCo-πalkyloxyCo-π alkyl, C0-iialkylthioC0- ualkyl, arylC0-iialkylthioC0.iialkyl, Co-πalkylaminoCo-πalkyl, arylCo.ιιalkylaminoC0. πalkyl, di(arylC1-I 1alkyl)aminoC0-πalkyl, C1 -πalkylcarbonylCo-n alkyl, aryl . π alky lcarbony 1C0- 11 alkyl, CM [alkylcarboxy C0-ι i alkyl, ary ICM I alkylcarboxy C0. πalkyl, Ci.πalkylcarbonylaminoCo-n alkyl, arylCi.nalkylcarbonylaminoCo.il alkyl, - Co-πalkylCOOR^, -C0-πalkylCONR5R6 wherein R4, R5 and R6 are independently selected from hydrogen, Cι-Cnalkyl, arylC0-Cπalkyl, or R5 and Rg are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one CpCnalkyl, arylC0-C πalkyl substituent. (ii) R'" is selected from the group consisting of
(a) hydrogen,
(b) Ci.nalkyl, substituted C Ialkyl wherein the substituents are independently selected from halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, carbamoyl, tetrahydrofuryl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl, hydroxypyronyl, C0- ii alkyloxy, arylC0.π alkyloxy, C0.n alkylthio, aryl C0.π alkylthio, C0-nalkylamino, arylCo- π alkylamino, di(arylC0-iialkyl)amino, C i .n alkylcarbonyl, arylCi. π alkylcarbonyl, Ci .πalkylcarboxy, arylCi.πalkylcarboxy, Ci.nalkylcarbonylamino, aryl Ci.nalkylcarbonylamino, -C0.nalkylCOOR7, -C0-πalkylCONR8R9 wherein R7, R8 and R are independently selected from hydrogen, CrC πalkyl, arylC0-C π alkyl, or R8 and R9 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one CrCπ alkyl, arylC0- C πalkyl substituent,
(c) mono-, di- and tri-substituted arylC0-C πalkyl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above for R and R ,
(iii) X is a mono-, di- or trisubstituted aryl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above for R and R , and aryl is selected from phenyl, biphenyl, naphthyl, dihydronaphthyl, tetrahydronaphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, azulenyl, anthryl, phenanthryl, fluorenyl, pyrenyl, thienyl, benzothienyl, isobenzothienyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzothienyl, furyl, pyranyl, benzofuranyl, isobenzofuranyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzofuranyl, pyrrolyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, indolizinyl, indazolyl, imidazolyl, benzimidazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyradazinyl, pyrimidinyl, triazinyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, 4H-quinolizinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, 1,8-naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, carbazolyl, acridinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, phenoxazinyl, chromanyl, benzodioxolyl, piperonyl, purinyl, hydroxypyronyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, benzthiazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, or thiadiazolyl, and wherein the remaining of Rls R2 and R3 are independently selected from the group consisting of:
(i) hydrogen;
(ii) C i.πalkyl, substituted Ci.nalkyl wherein the alkyl substituents are defined as above,
(iii) arylCo-iialkyl,
(iv) mono-, di- and tri- substituted arylC0-C n alkyl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
17. A compound as defined in claim 16 wherein aryl is selected from phenyl, naphthyl, biphenyl, thienyl, furyl, pyridyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
18. A compound as defined in claim 16 wherein aryl is phenyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
19. A compound as defined in claim 16 wherein aryl is naphthyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
20. A compound as defined in claim 16 wherein aryl is biphenyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
21. A compound as defined in claim 16 wherein aryl is thienyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
22. A compound as defined in claim 16 wherein aryl is furyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
23. A compound as defined in claim 16 wherein aryl is pyridyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
24. A compound with the structure depicted in Formula (A3):
Figure imgf000114_0001
O
(A3) wherein at least one of Rj, R2 and R3 substituents has the general structure depicted in
Formula (B)
X-C(R )=C(R")COOR"
(B) wherein
(i) R and R are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, Cj.n alkyl, optionally substituted arylCM 1 alkyl wherein the aryl substituents are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl, hydroxypyronyl, Ci.nalkyl, arylC]. πalkyl, C0-ι ι alkyloxy C0-π alkyl, arylCo-πalkyloxyCo-nalkyl, C0-iialkylthioCo- π alkyl, arylCo-πalkylthioCo-πalkyl, Co-nalkylaminoCo-πalkyl, arylC0-nalkylaminoCo- iialkyl, di(arylCi-nalkyl)aminoC0.n lkyl, Cι .πalkylcarbonylC0-πalkyl, arylCi. i jalkylcarbonylCo. π alkyl, C^i i alkylcarboxy C0-ι i alkyl, ary l .i ιalkylcarboxyC0- πalkyl, Cj.nalkylcarbonylaminoCo.il alkyl, arylCi.nalkylcarbonylaminoCo.πalkyl, - C0-nalkylCOOR , -C0-nalkylCONR5R6 wherein R4, R5 and Rg are independently selected from hydrogen, CpCπalkyl, ary lC0-Cπ alkyl, or R5 and R(, are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one Ci-Cnalkyl, arylC0-Cπalkyl substituent. (ii) R'" is selected from the group consisting of (a) hydrogen, (b) Ci.nalkyl, substituted Ci.nalkyl wherein the substituents are independently selected from halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, carbamoyl, tetrahydrofuryl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl, hydroxypyronyl, C0. π alkyloxy, arylC0.n alkyloxy, C0-π alkylthio, arylC0.πalkylthio, C0-ι [alkylamino, arylCo. ii alkylamino, di(arylC0-πalkyl)amino, C j _u alkylcarbonyl, arylC]. π alkylcarbonyl, Cj.π alkylcarboxy, arylCi.πalkylcarboxy, Ci.nalkylcarbonylamino, aryl Ci.nalkylcarbonylamino, -C0.πalkylCOOR7, -C0-πalkylCONR8R9 wherein R7, R8 and R9 are independently selected from hydrogen, CrCπalkyl, arylC0-Cπalkyl, or R8 and R9 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one CrC π alkyl, arylC0- C n alkyl substituent,
(c) mono-, di- and tri-substituted arylC0-Cπalkyl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above for R and R ,
(iii) X is a mono-, di- or trisubstituted aryl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above for R and R , and aryl is selected from phenyl, biphenyl, naphthyl, dihydronaphthyl, tetrahydronaphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, azulenyl, anthryl, phenanthryl, fluorenyl, pyrenyl, thienyl, benzothienyl, isobenzothienyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzothienyl, furyl, pyranyl, benzofuranyl, isobenzofuranyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzofuranyl, pyrrolyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, indolizinyl, indazolyl, imidazolyl, benzimidazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyradazinyl, pyrimidinyl, triazinyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, 4H-quinolizinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, 1,8-naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, carbazolyl, acridinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, phenoxazinyl, chromanyl, benzodioxolyl, piperonyl, purinyl, hydroxypyronyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, benzthiazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, or thiadiazolyl, and wherein the remaining of R R2 and R3 are independently selected from the group consisting of:
(i) hydrogen; (ii) Ci.nalkyl, substituted Ci.nalkyl, Ci .nalkylcarbonyl, substituted Cι_ i [alkylcarbonyl wherein the alkyl substituents are defined as above,
(iii) arylCo. π alkyl, arylC0.nalkylcarbonyl,
(iv) mono-, di- and tri-substituted arylC0-Cπalkyl, mono-, di- and tri- substituted arylC0-Cπalkylcarbonyl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
25. A compound as defined in claim 24 wherein aryl is selected from phenyl, naphthyl, biphenyl, thienyl, furyl, pyridyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
26. A compound as defined in claim 24 wherein aryl is phenyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
27. A compound as defined in claim 24 wherein aryl is naphthyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
28. A compound as defined in claim 24 wherein aryl is thienyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
29. A compound as defined in claim 24 wherein aryl is furyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
30. A compound as defined in claim 24 wherein aryl is pyridyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
31. A compound with the structure depicted in Formula (A4):
Figure imgf000117_0001
OH
(A4) wherein at least one of R1 ? R substituents has the general structure depicted in Formula (B)
X-C(R')=C(R")COOR"' (B) wherein
(i) R and R are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, Ci.nalkyl, optionally substituted arylC[ .π alkyl wherein the aryl substituents are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl, hydroxypyronyl, . πalkyl, arylCi.iialkyl, C0-iialkyloxyC0-iialkyl, arylCo.ιιalkyloxyC0.π alkyl, C0.ιιalkylthioC0. πalkyl, arylCo-πalkylthioCo-πalkyl, C0.πalkylaminoCo.πalkyl, arylCo-π lkylaminoCo- πalkyl, di(arylCi.iialkyl)aminoC0-iialkyl, Ci .nalkylcarbonylC0.nalkyl, arylCj. i ιalkylcarbonylC0-ι ιalkyl, Cι-ualkylcarboxyC0-ι jalkyl, ary l .πalkylcarboxyCo. πalkyl, Ci-πalkylcarbonylaminoCo-πalkyl, arylC^πalkylcarbonylaminoCo-πalkyl, - Co-πalkylCOOR3, -C0.nalkylCONR4R5 wherein R3, j and R5 are independently selected from hydrogen, -C πalkyl, arylC0-C π alkyl, or R4 and R5 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one Cj-C πalkyl, arylC0-Cπalkyl substituent. (ii) R"' is selected from the group consisting of
(a) hydrogen,
(b) Ci.nalkyl, substituted Ci.n lkyl wherein the substituents are independently selected from halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, carbamoyl, tetrahydrofuryl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl, hydroxypyronyl, C0.11 alkyloxy, arylC0-π alkyloxy, C0-π alkylthio, arylC0-πalkylthio, C0-nalkylamino, arylCo-iialkylamino, di(arylC0-πalkyl)amino, C i .π alkylcarbonyl, aryl . π alkylcarbonyl, Ci.iialkylcarboxy, arylCi.πalkylcarboxy, Ci.nalkylcarbonylamino, aryl C 1 alkylcarbonylamino, -C0-nalkylCOOR6, -C0-πalkylCONR7R8 wherein Rβ, R7 and R8 are independently selected from hydrogen, -C πalkyl, arylC0-C πalkyl, or R7 and R8 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one Cj-Cπ alkyl, arylC0- C π alkyl substituent,
(c) mono-, di- and tri-substituted arylC0-C πalkyl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above for R and R ,
(iii) X is a mono-, di- or trisubstituted aryl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above for R and R , and aryl is selected from phenyl, biphenyl, naphthyl, dihydronaphthyl, tetrahydronaphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, azulenyl, anthryl, phenanthryl, fluorenyl, pyrenyl, thienyl, benzothienyl, isobenzothienyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzothienyl, furyl, pyranyl, benzofuranyl, isobenzofuranyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzofuranyl, pyrrolyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, indolizinyl, indazolyl, imidazolyl, benzimidazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyradazinyl, pyrimidinyl, triazinyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, 4H-quinolizinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, 1,8-naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, carbazolyl, acridinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, phenoxazinyl, chromanyl, benzodioxolyl, piperonyl, purinyl, hydroxypyronyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, benzthiazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, or thiadiazolyl, and wherein the remaining of Rj, R2 is selected from the group consisting of:
(i) hydrogen;
(ii) C i.nalkyl, substituted Ci.nalkyl wherein the alkyl substituents are defined as above,
(iii) arylCo. π alkyl,
(iv) mono-, di- and tri-substituted arylC0-C nalkyl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
32. A compound as defined in claim 31 wherein aryl is selected from phenyl, naphthyl, biphenyl, thienyl, furyl, pyridyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
33. A compound as defined in claim 31 wherein aryl is phenyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
34. A compound as defined in claim 31 wherein aryl is naphthyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
35. A compound as defined in claim 31 wherein aryl is biphenyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
36. A compound as defined in claim 31 wherein aryl is thienyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
37. A compound as defined in claim 31 wherein aryl is furyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
38. A compound as defined in claim 31 wherein aryl is pyridyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
39. A compound with the structure depicted in Formula (A5):
Figure imgf000119_0001
(A5) wherein at least one of R(, R2 substituents has the general structure depicted in Formula (B) X-C(R')=C(R")COOR" (B)
wherein
(i) R and R are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, C]. πalkyl, optionally substituted arylCi.πalkyl wherein the aryl substituents are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl, hydroxypyronyl, Cj. πalkyl, arylC i-π alkyl, Co.ιιalkyloxyC0-πalkyl, arylCo-nalkyloxyCo-πalkyl, C0-ιιalkylthioCo- π alkyl, arylC0.iialkylthioC0.ii alkyl, C0-iialkylaminoC0.ii alkyl, arylCo-πalkylaminoCo- π alkyl, di(arylCι-ι1alkyl)aminoC0.nalkyl, Ci .nalkylcarbonylCo-nalkyl, arylCi. nalkylcarbonylCo-ι ι alkyl, C1-[1alkylcarboxyC0-ι ι alkyl, arylC i alkylcarboxy Co- ιι alkyl, Ci.πalkylcarbonylaminoCo.πalkyl, arylCi.nalkylcarbonylaminoCo.il alkyl, - C0-nalkylCOOR3, -C0-πalkylCONR4R5 wherein R3, R and R5 are independently selected from hydrogen, CpCπ alkyl, arylC0-Cπalkyl, or R4 and R5 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one C C πalkyl, arylC0-C πalkyl substituent. (ii) R'" is selected from the group consisting of
(a) hydrogen,
(b) Ci.nalkyl, substituted Cj. πalkyl wherein the substituents are independently selected from halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, carbamoyl, tetrahydrofuryl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl, hydroxypyronyl, C0.11 alkyloxy, arylC0-πalkyloxy, C0-n alkylthio, arylC0-πalkylthio, C0-π alkylamino, arylCo-πalkylamino, di(arylC0-πalkyl)amino, C i _u alkylcarbonyl, arylC[. ! [alkylcarbonyl, Ci.πalkylcarboxy, arylC[.[ [alkylcarboxy, Ci.nalkylcarbonylamino, aryl Ci.nalkylcarbonylamino, -C0-πalkylCOOR6, -C0.nalkylCONR7R8 wherein R , R7 and R8 are independently selected from hydrogen, -Cπalkyl, arylC0-C π alkyl, or R7 and R8 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one d-C πalkyl, arylC0- C πalkyl substituent,
(c) mono-, di- and tri-substituted arylC0-C πalkyl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above for R and R ,
(iii) X is a mono-, di- or trisubstituted aryl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above for R and R , and aryl is selected from phenyl, biphenyl, naphthyl, dihydronaphthyl, tetrahydronaphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, azulenyl, anthryl, phenanthryl, fluorenyl, pyrenyl, thienyl, benzothienyl, isobenzothienyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzothienyl, furyl, pyranyl, benzofuranyl, isobenzofuranyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzofuranyl, pyrrolyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, indolizinyl, indazolyl, imidazolyl, benzimidazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyradazinyl, pyrimidinyl, triazinyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, 4H-quinolizinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, 1,8-naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, carbazolyl, acridinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, phenoxazinyl, chromanyl, benzodioxolyl, piperonyl, purinyl, hydroxypyronyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, benzthiazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, or thiadiazolyl, and wherein the remaining of Ri, R2 is selected from the group consisting of:
(i) hydrogen;
(ii) C i.nalkyl, substituted Cι-π alkyl wherein the alkyl substituents are defined as above,
(iii) arylCo. π alkyl,
(iv) mono-, di- and tri-substituted arylC0-C alkyl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
40. A compound as defined in claim 39 wherein aryl is selected from phenyl, naphthyl, biphenyl, thienyl, furyl, pyridyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
41. A compound as defined in claim 39 wherein aryl is phenyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
42. A compound as defined in claim 39 wherein aryl is naphthyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
43. A compound as defined in claim 39 wherein aryl is biphenyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
44. A compound as defined in claim 39 wherein aryl is thienyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
45. A compound as defined in claim 39 wherein aryl is furyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
46. A compound as defined in claim 39 wherein aryl is pyridyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
47. A compound with the structure depicted in Formula (A6):
Figure imgf000122_0001
(A6) wherein at least one of Ri , R2, R3 and R4 substituents has the general structure depicted in Formula (B)
X-C(R C(R")COOR" (B) wherein
(i) R and R are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, Cj. π alkyl, optionally substituted arylCi.π alkyl wherein the aryl substituents are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl, hydroxypyronyl, Ci.nalkyl, arylC[.i [alkyl, Co-πalkyloxyCo-πalkyl, arylCo-πalkyloxyCo-πalkyl, C0-iialkylthioC0- πalkyl, ary lC0-π alky lthioC0-π alkyl, C0-iialkylaminoC0-ii alkyl, arylC0-πalkylaminoCo- π alkyl, di(arylCι-πalkyl)aminoC0-πalkyl, Ci .nalkylcarbonylCo-iialkyl, arylCi. π alky lcarbonylC0-ιι alkyl, Cι.πalkylcarboxyC0.ι i alkyl, ary lCι.πalkylcarboxyC0. πalkyl, C i.π alky lcarbonylaminoC0.π alkyl, arylCi.nalkylcarbonylaminoCo-nalkyl, - C0.nalkylCOOR5, -C0.πalkylCONR6R7 wherein R5, R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, Cj-Cπalkyl, arylC0-Cnalkyl, or Rή and R7 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one Cj-C πalkyl, arylC0-Cπalkyl substituent. (ii) R'" is selected from the group consisting of
(a) hydrogen,
(b) Ci.nalkyl, substituted Ci.nalkyl wherein the substituents are independently selected from halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, carbamoyl, tetrahydrofuryl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl, hydroxypyronyl, C0- π alkyloxy, arylC0.π alkyloxy, C0-π alkylthio, arylC0.πalkylthio, C0-π alkylamino, arylC0- π alkylamino, di(arylC0.iialkyl)amino, Ci _n alkylcarbonyl, arylC). π alkylcarbonyl, Ci .πalkylcarboxy, arylC1-ualkylcarboxy, Ci.nalkylcarbonylamino, aryl Ci.nalkylcarbonylamino, -C0-πalkylCOOR8, -C0-ιιalkylCONR9Rι0 wherein R8, R9 and R]0 are independently selected from hydrogen, C[-C[ [alkyl, arylC0-C[ [alkyl, or R9 and R]0 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one C]-Cnalkyl, arylC0- C π alkyl substituent, (c) mono-, di- and tri-substituted arylC0-Cn alkyl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above for R and R ,
(iii) X is a mono-, di- or trisubstituted aryl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above for R and R , and aryl is selected from phenyl, biphenyl, naphthyl, dihydronaphthyl, tetrahydronaphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, azulenyl, anthryl, phenanthryl, fluorenyl, pyrenyl, thienyl, benzothienyl, isobenzothienyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzothienyl, furyl, pyranyl, benzofuranyl, isobenzofuranyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzofuranyl, pyrrolyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, indolizinyl, indazolyl, imidazolyl, benzimidazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyradazinyl, pyrimidinyl, triazinyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, 4H-quinolizinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, 1,8-naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, carbazolyl, acridinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, phenoxazinyl, chromanyl, benzodioxolyl, piperonyl, purinyl, hydroxypyronyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, benzthiazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, or thiadiazolyl, and wherein the remaining of Ri, R2, R3 and R4 are independently selected from the group consisting of:
(i) hydrogen;
(ii) Ci.nalkyl, substituted Ci.nalkyl wherein the alkyl substituents are defined as above,
(iii) arylCo-π alkyl,
(iv) mono-, di- and tri-substituted arylC0-C alkyl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above, with the proviso that when R3 and R4 are selected from substituted phenyl or substituted furyl then the phenyl and furyl substituents exclude hydroxy, halo, trifluoromethyl, Cι.6alkyl, C[.6alkyloxy, C)-6alkylthio, amino, C[-6alkylamino, di(Cι-6alkyl)amino, phenylC[-6alkylamino and di(phenylC[ . 6alkyl)amino, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
48. A compound as defined in claim 47 wherein aryl is selected from phenyl, naphthyl, biphenyl, thienyl, furyl, pyridyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
49. A compound as defined in claim 47 wherein aryl is phenyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
50. A compound as defined in claim 47 wherein aryl is naphthyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
51. A compound as defined in claim 47 wherein aryl is biphenyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
52. A compound as defined in claim 47 wherein aryl is thienyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
53. A compound as defined in claim 47 wherein aryl is furyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
54. A compound as defined in claim 47 wherein aryl is pyridyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
55. A compound with the structure depicted in Formula (A6):
R* RΛ
V Y"' Ri
R2
(A6) wherein R4 is selected from -COR5, -COOR , -CONR7R wherein R5 thru R8 are independently selected from hydrogen, Cj-Cπalkyl, substituted Ci.nalkyl where the alkyl substituents are as defined below, optionally substituted arylC0-C πalkyl where the aryl substituents are as defined below, or R7 and R8 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one CpCπalkyl, arylCo-C πalkyl substituent, and wherein at least one of Rj, R2, and R3 substituents has the general structure depicted in Formula (B)
X-C(R')=C(R")COOR"' (B)
wherein
(i) R and R are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, Ci.nalkyl, optionally substituted arylCj. πalkyl wherein the aryl substituents are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl, hydroxypyronyl, Ci.nalkyl, arylCi.iialkyl, Co-πalkyloxyCo-πalkyl, arylCo-πalkyloxyCo-π alkyl, C0.nalkylthioC0- π alkyl, ary lC0-π alky lthioC0-π alkyl, C0-ι 1 alky laminoC0-π alkyl, arylCo-π all y laminoCo. π alkyl, di(arylCι-πalkyl)aminoCo-πalkyl, Ci .π alky lcarbonylCo-n alkyl, arylCi. π alky lcarbony 1C0- 11 alkyl, CM jalkylcarboxyCo-i 1 alkyl, ary ICM lalkylcarboxyCo- πalkyl, Ci.πalkylcarbonylaminoCo-πalkyl, arylCi-πalkylcarbonylaminoCo-πalkyl, - C0-πalkylCOOR9, -C0-πalkylCONRιoRπ wherein R9, R10 and Rπ are independently selected from hydrogen, Ci-Cnalkyl, arylC0-Cπ alkyl, or Rj0 and Rn are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one Ci-Cnalkyl, arylC0-C[ [alkyl substituent.
(ii) R'" is selected from the group consisting of
(a) hydrogen,
(b) Ci.nalkyl, substituted Q. πalkyl wherein the substituents are independently selected from halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, carbamoyl, tetrahydrofuryl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl, hydroxypyronyl, Co-πalkyloxy, arylC0-π alkyloxy, C0-π alkylthio, arylC0-πalkylthio, C0-π alkylamino, arylCo-πalkylamino, di(arylCo-nalkyl)amino, C [ .[ [ alkylcarbonyl, arylC[. i [alkylcarbonyl, Ci.π alkylcarboxy, arylCi.i [alkylcarboxy, Ci.nalkylcarbonylamino, aryl Ci.nalkylcarbonylamino, -C0-πalkylCOORι2, -C0-iialkylCONRi3Ri4 wherein RJ2, Ro and RM are independently selected from hydrogen, C Cπ alkyl, arylC0- Cnalkyl, or Rj3 and Rι are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one C Cπalkyl, arylC0-C πalkyl substituent,
(c) mono-, di- and tri-substituted arylC0-C πalkyl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above for R and R ,
(iii) X is a mono-, di- or trisubstituted aryl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above for R and R , and aryl is selected from phenyl, biphenyl, naphthyl, dihydronaphthyl, tetrahydronaphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, azulenyl, anthryl, phenanthryl, fluorenyl, pyrenyl, thienyl, benzothienyl, isobenzothienyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzothienyl, furyl, pyranyl, benzofuranyl, isobenzofuranyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzofuranyl, pyrrolyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, indolizinyl, indazolyl, imidazolyl, benzimidazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyradazinyl, pyrimidinyl, triazinyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, 4H-quinolizinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, 1,8-naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, carbazolyl, acridinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, phenoxazinyl, chromanyl, benzodioxolyl, piperonyl, purinyl, hydroxypyronyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, benzthiazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, or thiadiazolyl, and wherein the remaining of R[, R2 and R are independently selected from the group consisting of:
(i) hydrogen;
(ii) C i.nalkyl, substituted Ci.nalkyl wherein the alkyl substituents are defined as above,
(iii) arylCo. π alkyl, (iv) mono-, di- and tri-substituted arylC0-C n alkyl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
56. A compound as defined in claim 55 wherein aryl is selected from phenyl, naphthyl, biphenyl, thienyl, furyl, pyridyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
57. A compound as defined in claim 55 wherein aryl is phenyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
58. A compound as defined in claim 55 wherein aryl is naphthyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
59. A compound as defined in claim 55 wherein aryl is biphenyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
60. A compound as defined in claim 55 wherein aryl is thienyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
61. A compound as defined in claim 55 wherein aryl is furyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
62. A compound as defined in claim 55 wherein aryl is pyridyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
63. A compound with the structure depicted in Formula (A6): R3 R„
N . N
^ Y Ri
R2 (A6)
wherein R3 is selected from -COR5, -COOR6, -CONR7R8 wherein R5 thru R8 are independently selected from hydrogen, CpCπalkyl, substituted Ci.nalkyl where the alkyl substituents are as defined below, optionally substituted arylC0-Cπ alkyl where the aryl substituents are as defined below, or R7 and R8 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one C Cπalkyl, arylCo-Cπ alkyl substituent, and wherein at least one of Ri, R2, and ^ substituents has the general structure depicted in Formula (B)
X-C(R')=C(R")COOR" (B)
wherein
(i) R and R are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, . πalkyl, optionally substituted arylC[. πalkyl wherein the aryl substituents are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl, hydroxypyronyl, Ci.nalkyl, arylC[. π alkyl, C0.iialkyloxyC0.iialkyl, arylC0-iialkyloxyC0-iialkyl, C0-πalkylthioC0- πalkyl, arylCo-πalkylthioCo-πalkyl, C0-iialkylaminoC0-ii alkyl, arylC0-ιιalkylaminoC0- ualkyl, di(arylC1-i1alkyl)aminoC0-nalkyl, Ci .nalkylcarbonylC0-iialkyl, arylC[. ! [alkylcarbonylCo-i [alkyl, C).[ ιalkylcarboxyC0.ι i alkyl, ary lCi.πalkylcarboxyCo. nalkyl, Cι.πalkylcarbonylaminoC0-ιι alkyl, arylCi.nalkylcarbonylaminoCo.πalkyl, - Co-πalkylCOORcj, -Co-πalkylCONRι0Rπ wherein R9, R[0 and Rπ are independently selected from hydrogen, CpCπ alkyl, arylC0-C[ i alkyl, or R) 0 and Rπ are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one CpCπalkyl, arylCo- [alkyl substituent.
(ii) R'" is selected from the group consisting of
(a) hydrogen,
(b) Ci.nalkyl, substituted Ci.nalkyl wherein the substituents are independently selected from halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, carbamoyl, tetrahydrofuryl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl, hydroxypyronyl, C0- π alkyloxy, ary lC0-n alkyloxy, C0.n alkylthio, arylC0-n alkylthio, C0-π alkylamino, arylCo-πalkylamino, di(arylC0.πalkyl)amino, C[ .n alkylcarbonyl, arylC[. i [alkylcarbonyl, C1.1 [alkylcarboxy, arylCi.πalkylcarboxy, C^π alkylcarbonylamino, aryl Ci.nalkylcarbonylamino, -C0-πalkylCOORι2, -C0-nalkylCONRi3Ri4 wherein R) 2, R13 and RH are independently selected from hydrogen, Cj-Cπalkyl, arylC0- C nalkyl, or Rι3 and R)4 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one C Cπalkyl, arylC0-C[ [alkyl substituent,
(c) mono-, di- and tri-substituted arylCo-Cπ alkyl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above for R and R ,
(iii) X is a mono-, di- or trisubstituted aryl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above for R and R , and aryl is selected from phenyl, biphenyl, naphthyl, dihydronaphthyl, tetrahydronaphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, azulenyl, anthryl, phenanthryl, fluorenyl, pyrenyl, thienyl, benzothienyl, isobenzothienyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzothienyl, furyl, pyranyl, benzofuranyl, isobenzofuranyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzofuranyl, pyrrolyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, indolizinyl, indazolyl, imidazolyl, benzimidazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyradazinyl, pyrimidinyl, triazinyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, 4H-quinolizinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, 1,8-naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, carbazolyl, acridinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, phenoxazinyl, chromanyl, benzodioxolyl, piperonyl, purinyl, hydroxypyronyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, benzthiazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, or thiadiazolyl, and wherein the remaining of R\, R2 and t are independently selected from the group consisting of:
(i) hydrogen;
(ii) Ci.nalkyl, substituted Ci.nalkyl wherein the alkyl substituents are defined as above,
(iii) arylCo.πalkyl,
(iv) mono-, di- and tri-substituted arylC0-C n alkyl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
64. A compound as defined in claim 63 wherein aryl is selected from phenyl, naphthyl, biphenyl, thienyl, furyl, pyridyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
65. A compound as defined in claim 63 wherein aryl is phenyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
66. A compound as defined in claim 63 wherein aryl is naphthyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
67. A compound as defined in claim 63 wherein aryl is biphenyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
68. A compound as defined in claim 63 wherein aryl is thienyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
69. A compound as defined in claim 63 wherein aryl is furyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
70. A compound as defined in claim '63 wherein aryl is pyridyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
71. A compound with the structure depicted in Formula (A7):
R* R,
Figure imgf000132_0001
(A7)
wherein R2 is selected from -COR5, -COOR6, -CONR7R8 wherein R5 thru R8 are independently selected from hydrogen, CpCπalkyl, substituted Ci.nalkyl where the alkyl substituents are as defined below, optionally substituted arylCo-Cn alkyl where the aryl substituents are as defined below, or R7 and R8 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one Ci-Cnalkyl, arylC0-Cπ alkyl substituent, and wherein at least one of Ri and R3 substituents has the general structure depicted in Formula (B)
X-C(R C(R")COOR" (B)
wherein
(i) R and R are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, Ci.nalkyl, optionally substituted arylCi-πalkyl wherein the aryl substituents are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl, hydroxypyronyl, Ci.nalkyl, arylC^πalkyl, C0.iialkyloxyC0.iialkyl, arylCo.πalkyloxyC0.πalkyl, C0.πalkylthioC0. πalkyl, arylC0.π alkylthio C0.π alkyl, Co-nalkylaminoCo-πalkyl, arylC0-πalkylaminoC0- πalkyl, di(arylCι.ιιalkyl)aminoCo-ιιalkyl, Cι -ι1alkylcarbonylCo-ιιalkyl, arylCi. πaikylcarbonylCo-πalkyl, Ci.i i alkylcarboxy C0.ι ιalkyl, ary lCi.πalkylcarboxyCo. πalkyl, C^πalkylcarbonylaminoCo-nalkyl, arylC^πalkylcarbonylaminoCo-πalkyl, - C0-πalkylCOOR9, -C0-iialkylCONRioRn wherein R9, R[0 and Rπ are independently selected from hydrogen, CpCπalkyl, arylC0-C π alkyl, or Rι0 and Rn are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one C Cπalkyl, arylC0-Cπalkyl substituent.
(ii) R'" is selected from the group consisting of
(a) hydrogen,
(b) Ci.nalkyl, substituted Cj_ πalkyl wherein the substituents are independently selected from halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, carbamoyl, tetrahydrofuryl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl, hydroxypyronyl, Co- π alkyloxy, arylC0-πalkyloxy, C0-π alkylthio, arylC0-πalkylthio, C0-πalkylamino, arylCo- π alkylamino, di(arylC0-πalkyl)amino, C [ .n alkylcarbonyl, arylC[. π alkylcarbonyl, Cj.i [alkylcarboxy, arylCi-πalkylcarboxy, Ci.nalkylcarbonylamino, aryl Ci.nalkylcarbonylamino, -C0-πalkylCOORι2, -C0-nalkylCONRi3R14 wherein R12, Rι3 and Rj are independently selected from hydrogen, C Cπalkyl, arylC0- C πalkyl, or Rι3 and RM are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one Cr Cπalkyl, arylC0-C π alkyl substituent,
(c) mono-, di- and tri-substituted arylC0-Cπ alkyl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above for R and R ,
(iii) X is a mono-, di- or trisubstituted aryl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above for R and R , and aryl is selected from phenyl, biphenyl, naphthyl, dihydronaphthyl, tetrahydronaphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, azulenyl, anthryl, phenanthryl, fluorenyl, pyrenyl, thienyl, benzothienyl, isobenzothienyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzothienyl, furyl, pyranyl, benzofuranyl, isobenzofuranyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzofuranyl, pyrrolyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, indolizinyl, indazolyl, imidazolyl, benzimidazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyradazinyl, pyrimidinyl, triazinyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, 4H-quinolizinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, 1,8-naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, carbazolyl, acridinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, phenoxazinyl, chromanyl, benzodioxolyl, piperonyl, purinyl, hydroxypyronyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, benzthiazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, or thiadiazolyl, and wherein the remaining of Ri and R are independently selected from the group consisting of:
(i) hydrogen;
(ii) C i.! [alkyl, substituted Ci.nalkyl wherein the alkyl substituents are defined as above,
(iii) arylCo-π alkyl,
(iv) mono-, di- and tri-substituted arylC0-Cn alkyl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
72. A compound as defined in claim 71 wherein aryl is selected from phenyl, naphthyl, biphenyl, thienyl, furyl, pyridyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
73. A compound as defined in claim 71 wherein aryl is phenyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
74. A compound as defined in claim 71 wherein aryl is naphthyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
75. A compound as defined in claim 71 wherein aryl is biphenyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
76. A compound as defined in claim 71 wherein aryl is thienyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
77. A compound as defined in claim 71 wherein aryl is furyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
78. A compound as defined in claim 71 wherein aryl is pyridyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
79. A compound with the structure depicted in Formula (A8):
Figure imgf000135_0001
(A8) wherein at least one of Rj and R2 substituents has the general structure depicted in Formula (B)
X-C(R C(R")COOR" (B)
wherein
(i) R and R are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, Ci.nalkyl, optionally substituted aryl Ci.nalkyl wherein the aryl substituents are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl, hydroxypyronyl, Ci.nalkyl, arylC). πalkyl, C0.iialkyloxyC0-iialkyl, arylC0.iialkyloxyC0-iialkyl, C0-πalkylthioCo- πalkyl, arylCo-πalkylthioCo-πalkyl, Co-πalkylaminoCo-πalkyl, arylC0-iialkylaminoC0. πalkyl, di(arylC[.πalkyl)aminoCo.πalkyl, C^nalkylcarbonylCo-n alkyl, arylCi. πalkylcarbonylCo-πalkyl, C[.ι [ alkylcarboxy C0-π alkyl, ary l .i [ alkylcarboxy C0. iialkyl, Ci.nalkylcarbonylaminoCo-iialkyl, arylC^πalkylcarbonylaminoCo-πalkyl, - C0-πalkylCOOR4, -C0-ιιalkylCONR5R6 wherein R4, R5 and Rg are independently selected from hydrogen, Cj-C πalkyl, arylC0-Cπalkyl, or R5 and Rg are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one -Cπalkyl, arylC0-Cπalkyl substituent. (ii) R'" is selected from the group consisting of
(a) hydrogen,
(b) Ci.nalkyl, substituted Cj. πalkyl wherein the substituents are independently selected from halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, carbamoyl, tetrahydrofuryl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl, hydroxypyronyl, C0. π alkyloxy, arylC0.π alkyloxy, C0-π alkylthio, arylC0-πalkylthio, C0-π alkylamino, arylCo-πalkylamino, di(arylC0.πalkyl)amino, C i .i [alkylcarbonyl, arylC[. π alkylcarbonyl, Q .πalkylcarboxy, arylCi.i [alkylcarboxy, Ci.nalkylcarbonylamino, aryl Ci.nalkylcarbonylamino, -C0-πalkylCOOR7, -C0.nalkylCONR8R9 wherein R7, R8 and R9 are independently selected from hydrogen, CpCπ alkyl, arylC0-Cπ alkyl, or R8 and R9 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one Ci-Cnalkyl, arylC0- C π alkyl substituent,
(c) mono-, di- and tri-substituted arylC0-C πalkyl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above for R and R ,
(iii) X is a mono-, di- or trisubstituted aryl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above for R and R , and aryl is selected from phenyl, biphenyl, naphthyl, dihydronaphthyl, tetrahydronaphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, azulenyl, anthryl, phenanthryl, fluorenyl, pyrenyl, thienyl, benzothienyl, isobenzothienyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzothienyl, furyl, pyranyl, benzofuranyl, isobenzofuranyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzofuranyl, pyrrolyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, indolizinyl, indazolyl, imidazolyl, benzimidazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyradazinyl, pyrimidinyl, triazinyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, 4H-quinolizinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, 1,8-naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, carbazolyl, acridinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, phenoxazinyl, chromanyl, benzodioxolyl, piperonyl, purinyl, hydroxypyronyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, benzthiazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, or thiadiazolyl, and wherein the remaining of Ri and R2 is independently selected from the group consisting of:
(i) hydrogen;
(ii) C [.π alkyl, substituted C cnalkyl wherein the alkyl substituents are defined as above,
(iii) ary 1C0. π alkyl,
(iv) mono-, di- and tri-substituted arylC0-C n alkyl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above, and wherein m is an integer between 0 and 4 and each R3 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl, hydroxypyronyl, Ci.nalkyl, C0.iialkyloxyC0.ii alkyl, arylC0.iialkyloxyC0.iialkyl, C0. π alky lthioCo-ii alkyl, arylCo-πalkylthioCo-πalkyl, C0-π alky laminoCo-π alkyl, arylC0. π alky laminoCo. ii alkyl, di(arylCι-πalkyl)aminoCo-πalkyl, Cι.nalkylcarbonylC0. πalkyl, Cι.πalkylcarboxyC0.π alkyl, Ci .πalkylcarbonylaminoC0.πalkyl, arylCj. i lalkylcarbonylCo-πalkyl, arylCi.nalkylcarboxyCo.il alkyl, arylCi.i ιalkylcarbonyl- aminoCo-π alkyl, -CH-CHCOOR,0,
-CH=CHCONRΠRI2, -C0-πalkylCOORι3, -C0-ιιalkylCONR,4R,5 wherein R10 thru Ri5 are independently selected from hydrogen, CpCnalkyl, ary lC0-Cπ alkyl, or Rn and Rι2 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one CpCnalkyl, arylC0- Ci [alkyl substituent, or R14 and R15 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one C[-C π alkyl, arylC0-Cπ alkyl substituent, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
80. A compound as defined in claim 79 wherein aryl is selected from phenyl, naphthyl, biphenyl, thienyl, furyl, pyridyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
81. A compound as defined in claim 79 wherein aryl is phenyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
82. A compound as defined in claim 79 wherein aryl is naphthyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
83. A compound as defined in claim 79 wherein aryl is biphenyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
84. A compound as defined in claim 79 wherein aryl is thienyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
85. A compound as defined in claim 79 wherein aryl is furyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
86. A compound as defined in claim 79 wherein aryl is pyridyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
87. A compound with the structure depicted in Formula (A8):
Figure imgf000138_0001
(A8) wherein R[ is selected from -CORig, -COORp, -CONR)8Rι9 wherein R[6 thru R!9 are independently selected from hydrogen, CpCnalkyl, substituted Cj.πalkyl where the alkyl substituents are as defined below, optionally substituted arylCo-Cn alkyl where the aryl substituents are as defined below, or Rι8 and Rj are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one CpCnalkyl, aryl C0-C πalkyl substituent, and wherein R2 has the general structure depicted in Formula (B)
X-C(R')=C(R")C00R"' (B) wherein
(i) R and R are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, Ci.nalkyl, optionally substituted arylCi-π alkyl wherein the aryl substituents are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl, hydroxypyronyl, Ci.nalkyl, arylCi-iialkyl, C0.iialkyloxyCo.n alkyl, arylCo-πalkyloxyCo-πalkyl, Co-πalkylthioC0. iialkyl, ary 1C 0-π alky lthioC0-π alkyl, Co-πalkylaminoCo-πalkyl, arylC0-iialkylaminoC0- ιι alkyl, di(arylCi-nalkyl)aminoC0-nalkyl, Cι .ιιalkylcarbonylC0.πalkyl, arylCi. π alkylcarbonylCo.π alkyl, Ci-πalkylcarboxyCo-πalkyl, arylCι.πalkylcarboxyC0- π alkyl, Ci.nalkylcarbonylaminoCo.il alkyl, arylCi-π alky lcarbonylarninoC0.ιι alkyl, - Co-πalkylCOOR^, -Co-πalkylCONRsRg wherein R , R5 and Rg are independently selected from hydrogen, CpCnalkyl, arylC0-Cπalkyl, or R5 and Rg are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one C[-C[ [alkyl, arylC0-Cnalkyl substituent. (ii) R'" is selected from the group consisting of
(a) hydrogen,
(b) Ci.nalkyl, substituted Ci.nalkyl wherein the substituents are independently selected from halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, carbamoyl, tetrahydrofuryl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl, hydroxypyronyl, C0. π alkyloxy, arylC0-π alkyloxy, C0.π alkylthio, arylC0.πalkylthio, C0.πalkylamino, arylCo-iialkylamino, di(arylCo-iialkyl)amino, C i .nalkylcarbonyl, arylCi. π alkylcarbonyl, Ci.πalkylcarboxy, arylCi.π alkylcarboxy, Ci.nalkylcarbonylamino, aryl Ci.nalkylcarbonylamino, -C0-πalkylCOOR7, -C0-nalkylCONRgR9 wherein R7, Rg and R9 are independently selected from hydrogen, CpCnalkyl, arylC0-C π alkyl, or Rg and R9 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one CpCnalkyl, arylC0- C π alkyl substituent,
(c) mono-, di- and tri-substituted arylC0-Cπ alkyl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above for R and R ,
(iii) X is a mono-, di- or trisubstituted aryl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above for R and R , and aryl is selected from phenyl, biphenyl, naphthyl, dihydronaphthyl, tetrahydronaphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, azulenyl, anthryl, phenanthryl, fluorenyl, pyrenyl, thienyl, benzothienyl, isobenzothienyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzothienyl, furyl, pyranyl, benzofuranyl, isobenzofuranyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzofuranyl, pyrrolyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, indolizinyl, indazolyl, imidazolyl, benzimidazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyradazinyl, pyrimidinyl, triazinyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, 4H-quinolizinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, 1,8-naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, carbazolyl, acridinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, phenoxazinyl, chromanyl, benzodioxolyl, piperonyl, purinyl, hydroxypyronyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, benzthiazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, or thiadiazolyl, and wherein R2 is selected from the group consisting of:
(i) hydrogen;
(ii) C i.nalkyl, substituted Ci.nalkyl wherein the alkyl substituents are defined as above,
(iii) arylCo. H alkyl,
(iv) mono-, di- and tri-substituted arylC0-C n alkyl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above, and wherein m is an integer between 0 and 4 and each R3 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl, hydroxypyronyl, Ci.nalkyl, Co-ιιalkyloxyC0.π alkyl, arylC0.iialkyloxyC0.ii alkyl, C0. πalkylthioCo-πalkyl, arylC0.iialkylthioC0-iialkyl, Co -πalkylaminoC0.n alkyl, arylC0- π alky laminoC0- π alkyl, di(arylCι-ιιalkyl)aminoC0-πalkyl, Ci.πalkylcarbonylCo- π alkyl, C^nalkylcarboxyCo-πalkyl, Ci .πalkylcarbonylaminoCo-πalkyl, arylCj. πalkylcarbonylCo-i ι alkyl, arylCi.i ιalkylcarboxyC0-π alkyl, arylCi.i ιalkylcarbonyl- aminoCo.li alkyl, -CH=CHCOORι0,
-CH=CHCONR,ιR,2, -Co.ιιalkylCOORi3, -C0.nalkylCONR,4R15 wherein R,0 thru R[5 are independently selected from hydrogen, CpCnalkyl, arylC0-C πalkyl, or Rn and R[2 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one CpCnalkyl, arylC0- Cπalkyl substituent, or R14 and R15 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one CpCnalkyl, aryl C0-Cπ alkyl substituent, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
88. A compound as defined in claim 87 wherein aryl is selected from phenyl, naphthyl, biphenyl, thienyl, furyl, pyridyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
89. A compound as defined in claim 87 wherein aryl is phenyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
90. A compound as defined in claim 87 wherein aryl is naphthyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
91. A compound as defined in claim 87 wherein aryl is biphenyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
92. A compound as defined in claim 87 wherein aryl is thienyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
93. A compound as defined in claim 87 wherein aryl is furyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
94. A compound as defined in claim 87 wherein aryl is pyridyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
95. A compound with the structure depicted in Formula (A9):
Figure imgf000142_0001
(A9) wherein at least one of Ri and R2 substituents has the general structure depicted in Formula (B)
X-C(R )=C(R")COOR" (B)
wherein
(i) R and R are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, Ci.nalkyl, optionally substituted arylCi.nalkyl wherein the aryl substituents are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl, hydroxypyronyl, . π alkyl, arylCi.nalkyl, C0-iialkyloxyC0.iialkyl, arylC0-iialkyloxyC0.iialkyl, C0-iialkylthioC0. πalkyl, arylCo-πalkylthioCo-Halkyl, Co_nalkylaminoCo.il alkyl, ary lC0.π alky laminoC0. lialkyl, di(arylCι.ualkyl)aminoCo.πalkyl, Ci .nalkylcarbonylCo-nalkyl, arylC]. πalkylcarbonylCo-πalkyl, Ci.nalkylcarboxyC0-nalkyl, arylQ.πalkylcarboxyCo. πalkyl, Ci-πalkylcarbonylaminoCo-πalkyl, arylCi.πalkylcarbonylaminoCo.iialkyl, - C0-πalkylCOOR4, -C0-ιι lkylCONR5Rg wherein R4, R5 and Rg are independently selected from hydrogen, CpCnalkyl, arylC0-Cπalkyl, or R5 and Rg are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one CpCnalkyl, arylC0-Cπalkyl substituent. (ii) R'" is selected from the group consisting of
(a) hydrogen,
(b) Cj. πalkyl, substituted Ci.nalkyl wherein the substituents are independently selected from halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, carbamoyl, tetrahydrofuryl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl, hydroxypyronyl, C0-πalkyloxy, arylC0-π alkyloxy, C0-π alkylthio, arylC0-π alkylthio, C0-π alkylamino, arylCo- π alkylamino, di(arylCo.iialkyl)amino, C [ _n alkylcarbonyl, arylCi. π alkylcarbonyl, Ci.πalkylcarboxy, arylCi.πalkylcarboxy, Ci.nalkylcarbonylamino, aryl Ci.nalkylcarbonylamino, -C0.πalkylCOOR7, -C0-πalkylCONRgR9 wherein R7, R8 and R9 are independently selected from hydrogen, CpCnalkyl, arylC0-C πalkyl, or R8 and R9 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one CpCnalkyl, arylC0- C πalkyl substituent,
(c) mono-, di- and tri-substituted arylC0-C πalkyl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above for R and R ,
(iii) X is a mono-, di- or trisubstituted aryl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above for R and R , and aryl is selected from phenyl, biphenyl, naphthyl, dihydronaphthyl, tetrahydronaphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, azulenyl, anthryl, phenanthryl, fluorenyl, pyrenyl, thienyl, benzothienyl, isobenzothienyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzothienyl, furyl, pyranyl, benzofuranyl, isobenzofuranyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzofuranyl, pyrrolyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, indolizinyl, indazolyl, imidazolyl, benzimidazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyradazinyl, pyrimidinyl, triazinyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, 4H-quinolizinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, 1,8-naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, carbazolyl, acridinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, phenoxazinyl, chromanyl, benzodioxolyl, piperonyl, purinyl, hydroxypyronyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, benzthiazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, or thiadiazolyl, and wherein the remaining of R[ and R2 is independently selected from the group consisting of:
(i) hydrogen;
(ii) C i.nalkyl, substituted Ci.nalkyl wherein the alkyl substituents are defined as above,
(iii) arylCo-π alkyl,
(iv) mono-, di- and tri-substituted arylC0-C n alkyl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above, and wherein m is an integer between 0 and 3 and each R3 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl, hydroxypyronyl, Ci. πalkyl, C0.iialkyloxyC0.iialkyl, arylCo-ιιalkyloxyC0.π alkyl, C0. πalkylthioCo-πalkyl, arylCo.ιιalkylthioC0.πalkyl, Co.πalkylaminoC0-π alkyl, arylC0- πalkylaminoCo-πalkyl, di(arylCι-πalkyl)aminoC0-ιιalkyl, Ci.πalkylcarbonylCo. πalkyl, C1-nalkylcarboxyC0-iialkyl, Ci .nalkylcarbonylaminoCo.il alkyl, arylQ. π alkylcarbonylCo-i i alkyl, arylCi.i ιalkylcarboxyC0-πalkyl, arylCi.πalkylcarbonyl- aminoCo.π alkyl, -CH=CHCOOR,0,
-CH=CHCONRΠR,2, -C0.ιιalkylCOOR,3, -C0.iialkylCONRi4R,5 wherein R,0 thru Ri5 are independently selected from hydrogen, C C[ [alkyl, arylC0-C πalkyl, or Rn and R[2 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one CpCnalkyl, arylC0- Cualkyl substituent, or R) and Rl5 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one CpCnalkyl, ary lC0-Cn alkyl substituent, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
96. A compound as defined in claim 95 wherein aryl is selected from phenyl, naphthyl, biphenyl, thienyl, furyl, pyridyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
97. A compound as defined in claim 95 wherein aryl is phenyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
98. A compound as defined in claim 95 wherein aryl is naphthyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
99. A compound as defined in claim 95 wherein aryl is biphenyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
100. A compound as defined in claim 95 wherein aryl is thienyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
101. A compound as defined in claim 95 wherein aryl is furyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
102. A compound as defined in claim 95 wherein aryl is pyridyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
103. A compound having the structure depicted in Formula (A9):
Figure imgf000146_0001
(A9)
wherein R] or R2 is selected from -CORig, -COORp, -CONRι8Rι9 wherein Rig thru Ri9 are independently selected from hydrogen, CpCnalkyl, substituted Ci.nalkyl where the alkyl substituents are as defined below, optionally substituted arylC0- C πalkyl where the aryl substituents are as defined below, or Rig and Ri9 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one CpCnalkyl, arylCo-Cualkyl substituent, and wherein the remainder of R] or R2 has the general structure depicted in Formula (B)
X-C(R')=C(R")COOR" (B) wherein
(i) R and R are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, Cι.u lkyl, optionally substituted arylCi.nalkyl wherein the aryl substituents are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl, hydroxypyronyl, Ci.nalkyl, arylCi.nalkyl, C0-iialkyloxyC0.iialkyl, arylCo-πalkyloxyC0.πalkyl, C0.πalkylthioC0- πalkyl, arylCo-πalkylthioCo-πalkyl, Co-πalkylaminoCo-π alkyl, arylCo-πalkylaminoCo- π alkyl, di(arylCι-πalkyl)aminoCo-πalkyl, Ci .iialkylcarbonylCo.ii alkyl, arylCi. 11 alky lcarbony 1C0.11 alkyl, C i . [ i alkylcarboxy C0. π alkyl, a r y lC i . π alkylcarboxy C0. πalkyl, Cι.πalkylcarbonylaminoCo.πalkyl, arylCi.πalkylcarbonylaminoCo-πalkyl, - C0-iialkylCOOR4, -C0-iialkylCONR5Rg wherein R4, R5 and Rg are independently selected from hydrogen, CpCnalkyl, arylC0-C πalkyl, or R5 and Rg are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one CpCnalkyl, arylC0-Cπ alkyl substituent. (ii) R'" is selected from the group consisting of
(a) hydrogen,
(b) Ci.nalkyl, substituted Cj. πalkyl wherein the substituents are independently selected from halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, carbamoyl, tetrahydrofuryl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl, hydroxypyronyl, C0. π alkyloxy, arylC0.n alkyloxy, C0.π alkylthio, arylC0.πalkylthio, C0-πalkylamino, arylCo- π alkylamino, di(arylC0-ιιalkyl)amino, C{ .j alkylcarbonyl, arylCj. π alkylcarbonyl, Ci.π alkylcarboxy, arylCi.πalkylcarboxy, Ci.nalkylcarbonylamino, aryl Ci.nalkylcarbonylamino, -C0.πalkylCOOR7, -C0.πalkylCONRgR9 wherein R7, R8 and R9 are independently selected from hydrogen, CpC[ jalkyl, arylC0-Cπalkyl, or R8 and R9 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one CpCnalkyl, arylC0- C i ] alkyl substituent,
(c) mono-, di- and tri-substituted arylC0-Cπ alkyl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above for R and R ,
(iii) X is a mono-, di- or trisubstituted aryl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above for R and R , and aryl is selected from phenyl, biphenyl, naphthyl, dihydronaphthyl, tetrahydronaphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, azulenyl, anthryl, phenanthryl, fluorenyl, pyrenyl, thienyl, benzothienyl, isobenzothienyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzothienyl, furyl, pyranyl, benzofuranyl, isobenzofuranyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzofuranyl, pyrrolyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, indolizinyl, indazolyl, imidazolyl, benzimidazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyradazinyl, pyrimidinyl, triazinyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, 4H-quinolizinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, 1 ,8-naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, carbazolyl, acridinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, phenoxazinyl, chromanyl, benzodioxolyl, piperonyl, purinyl, hydroxypyronyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, benzthiazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, or thiadiazolyl, and wherein R2 is selected from the group consisting of:
(i) hydrogen;
(ii) C i.nalkyl, substituted Ci.n lkyl wherein the alkyl substituents are defined as above,
(iii) arylCo- 11 alkyl,
(iv) mono-, di- and tri-substituted arylC0-C [ [alkyl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above, and wherein m is an integer between 0 and 3 and each R is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl, hydroxypyronyl, Ci.nalkyl, C0. π alkyloxy Co- π alkyl, arylC0.iialkyloxyC0.iialkyl, C0- πalkylthioCo-nalkyl, arylC0-iialkylthioC0-iialkyl, Co-πalkylaminoCo-πalkyl, arylC0- πalkylaminoCo-πalkyl, di(arylCι-πalkyl)aminoC0.ιιalkyl, Ci.πalkylcarbonylCo. π alkyl, Ci.nalkylcarboxyCo.il alkyl, C[ .πalkylcarbonylaminoCo.πalkyl, arylCi. πalkylcarbonylCo. π alkyl, arylCj-πalkylcarboxyCo-πalkyl, arylCi.πalkylcarbonyl- aminoCo-π alkyl, -CH=CHCOOR]0,
-CH=CHCONRπRι2, -C0.πalkylCOORι3, -C0-iialkylCONRi4R,5 wherein R10 thru Ri5 are independently selected from hydrogen, CpCnalkyl, arylC0-C πalkyl, or Rπ and R!2 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one CpCnalkyl, arylC0- Cπalkyl substituent, or R[4 and Rl5 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one CpCnalkyl, arylCo-Cn alkyl substituent, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
104. A compound as defined in claim 103 wherein aryl is selected from phenyl, naphthyl, biphenyl, thienyl, furyl, pyridyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
105. A compound as defined in claim 103 wherein aryl is phenyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
106. A compound as defined in claim 103 wherein aryl is naphthyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
107. A compound as defined in claim 103 wherein aryl is biphenyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
108. A compound as defined in claim 103 wherein aryl is thienyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
109. A compound as defined in claim 103 wherein aryl is furyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
110. A compound as defined in claim 103 wherein aryl is pyridyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
111. A compound with the structure depicted in Formula (AlO):
Figure imgf000149_0001
Z2
(AlO) wherein Z\ and Z2 are independently selected from the group consisting of OR3, SR , NR5Rg, wherein R3, Rj, R5, Rg are independently selected from:
(i) hydrogen;
(ii) Cpnalkyl, substituted Ci.nalkyl, C[ -πalkylcarbonyl, substituted C[. 11 alkylcarbonyl wherein the alkyl substituents are defined as below,
(iii) arylCo-11 alkyl, arylC0-ιι alkylcarbonyl; (iv) mono-, di- and tri-substituted arylC0-Cπalkyl; mono-, di- and tri- substituted arylCo-Cπ alkylcarbonyl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as in below, and wherein at least one of Ri and R2 substituents has the general structure depicted in Formula (B)
X-C(R C(R")COOR" (B) wherein
(i) R and R are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, Ci.nalkyl, optionally substituted arylCi.nalkyl wherein the aryl substituents are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl, hydroxypyronyl, Q. πalkyl, arylCi.nalkyl, Co-πalkyloxyCo-πalkyl, arylCo-πalkyloxyCo-πalkyl, C0-iialkylthioCo- iialkyl, arylC0-π alkylthio C0-π alkyl, Co-πalkylaminoCo-π alkyl, arylC0.πalkylaminoCo. πalkyl, di(arylCι-πalkyl)aminoCo.πalkyl, Ci .πalkylcarbonylCo-πalkyl, arylCi. iialkylcarbonylCo-πalkyl, Ci-πalkylcarboxyCo-nalkyl, arylCi.πalkylcarboxyCo. πalkyl, Ci-πalkylcarbonylaminoCo-πalkyl, arylCi-πalkylcarbonylaminoCo-π alkyl, - C0-πalkylCOOR7, -C0-iialkylCONRgR9 wherein R7, Rg and R9 are independently selected from hydrogen, CpCnalkyl, arylC0-Cπ alkyl, or Rg and R9 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one CpCnalkyl, aryl C0-Cπ alkyl substituent. (ii) R'" is selected from the group consisting of
(a) hydrogen,
(b) Ci.nalkyl, substituted Ci.nalkyl wherein the substituents are independently selected from halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, carbamoyl, tetrahydrofuryl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl, hydroxypyronyl, C0- π alkyloxy, arylC0-πalkyloxy, C0.π alkylthio, arylC0-π alkylthio, C0-πalkylamino, arylCo-πalkylamino, di(arylC0-πalkyl)amino, Cj _π alkylcarbonyl, arylCi. π alkylcarbonyl, Ci.πalkylcarboxy, arylCi.πalkylcarboxy, Ci.nalkylcarbonylamino, aryl C^πalkylcarbonylamino, -C0-nalkylCOORι0, -Co.πalkylCONRπRi2 wherein Rio, Rn and R) 2 are independently selected from hydrogen, C[-C[ [alkyl, arylC0- C n lkyl, or Rn and Rι2 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one C C πalkyl, arylC0-Cπalkyl substituent,
(c) mono-, di- and tri-substituted arylC0-Cπ alkyl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above for R and R ,
(iii) X is a mono-, di- or trisubstituted aryl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above for R and R , and aryl is selected from phenyl, biphenyl, naphthyl, dihydronaphthyl, tetrahydronaphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, azulenyl, anthryl, phenanthryl, fluorenyl, pyrenyl, thienyl, benzothienyl, isobenzothienyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzothienyl, furyl, pyranyl, benzofuranyl, isobenzofuranyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzofuranyl, pyrrolyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, indolizinyl, indazolyl, imidazolyl, benzimidazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyradazinyl, pyrimidinyl, triazinyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, 4H-quinolizinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, 1,8-naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, carbazolyl, acridinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, phenoxazinyl, chromanyl, benzodioxolyl, piperonyl, purinyl, hydroxypyronyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, benzthiazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, or thiadiazolyl, and wherein the remaining of Rb and R2 is independently selected from the group consisting of:
(i) hydrogen;
(ii) C i.nalkyl, substituted Ci.nalkyl wherein the alkyl substituents are defined as above,
(iii) arylCo- 11 alkyl,
(iv) mono-, di- and tri-substituted arylC0-C nalkyl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
1 12. A compound as defined in claim 111 wherein aryl is selected from phenyl, naphthyl, biphenyl, thienyl, furyl, pyridyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
113. A compound as defined in claim 111 wherein aryl is phenyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
114. A compound as defined in claim 111 wherein aryl is naphthyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
115. A compound as defined in claim 111 wherein aryl is biphenyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
116. A compound as defined in claim 111 wherein aryl is thienyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
117. A compound as defined in claim 111 wherein aryl is furyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
118. A compound as defined in claim 111 wherein aryl is pyridyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
119. A compound with the structure depicted in Formula (Al 1):
Figure imgf000152_0001
Ri (All) wherein at least one of Ri, R2 and R3 substituents has the general structure depicted in Formula (B)
X-C(R')=C(R")C00R" (B)
wherein
(i) R and R are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, Ci.nalkyl, optionally substituted arylCi-π alkyl wherein the aryl substituents are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl, hydroxypyronyl, Ci.nalkyl, arylCi.nalkyl, Co-iialkyloxyC0-iialkyl, arylCo-πalkyloxyCo-πalkyl, Co-πalkylthioCo- πalkyl, arylCo-πalkylthioCo-πalkyl, Co-πalkylaminoCo-π alkyl, arylCo-πalkylaminoCo. πalkyl, di(arylCι_πalkyl)aminoCo.πalkyl, Ci .nalkylcarbonylCo.il alkyl, arylCi. πalkylcarbonylCo- π alkyl, Ci.πalkylcarboxyCo-πalkyl, arylCi.πalkylcarboxyCo. nalkyl, Ci.πalleylcarbonylaminoCo.πalkyl, arylCi.πalkylcarbonylaminoCo.πalkyl, - Co-nalkylCOOR5, -Co-nalkylCONRgR7 wherein R5, Rg and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, CpCnalkyl, arylC0-Cπ alkyl, or Rg and R7 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one C rC π alkyl, arylCo-C i \ alkyl substituent.
(ii) R'" is selected from the group consisting of
(a) hydrogen,
(b) Ci.nalkyl, substituted Cj. πalkyl wherein the substituents are independently selected from halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, carbamoyl, tetrahydrofuryl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl, hydroxypyronyl,
Co-πalkyloxy, arylC0-π alkyloxy, C0-π alkylthio, arylCo-πalkylthio, C0-π alkylamino, arylCo. π alkylamino, di(arylCo-πalkyl)amino, C i _ι alkylcarbonyl, arylCj. π alkylcarbonyl, Cι_πalkylcarboxy, arylCi.πalkylcarboxy, Ci.nalkylcarbonylamino, aryl Ci.nalkylcarbonylamino, -C0-πalkylCOOR8, -Co-πalkylCONRgRio wherein Rg, R9 and Rio are independently selected from hydrogen, CpCnalkyl, arylC0-Cι i alkyl, or R9 and R]0 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached forming a cyclic system containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms with at least one CpCnalkyl, arylC0- C 11 alkyl substituent,
(c) mono-, di- and tri-substituted arylC0-Cπ alkyl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above for R and R ,
(iii) X is a mono-, di- or trisubstituted aryl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above for R and R , and aryl is selected from phenyl, biphenyl, naphthyl, dihydronaphthyl, tetrahydronaphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, azulenyl, anthryl, phenanthryl, fluorenyl, pyrenyl, thienyl, benzothienyl, isobenzothienyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzothienyl, furyl, pyranyl, benzofuranyl, isobenzofuranyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzofuranyl, pyrrolyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, indolizinyl, indazolyl, imidazolyl, benzimidazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyradazinyl, pyrimidinyl, triazinyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, 4H-quinolizinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, 1,8-naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, carbazolyl, acridinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, phenoxazinyl, chromanyl, benzodioxolyl, piperonyl, purinyl, hydroxypyronyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, benzthiazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, or thiadiazolyl, and wherein the remaining of Rls R2 and R3 are independently selected from the group consisting of: (i) hydrogen;
(ii) C ι.ualkyl, substituted Ci.nalkyl wherein the alkyl substituents are defined as above,
(iii) arylCo- π alkyl,
(iv) mono-, di- and tri-substituted arylC0-C n alkyl wherein the aryl substituents are defined as above, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
120. A compound as defined in claim 1 19 wherein aryl is selected from phenyl, naphthyl, biphenyl, thienyl, furyl, pyridyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
121. A compound as defined in claim 119 wherein aryl is phenyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
122. A compound as defined in claim 119 wherein aryl is naphthyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
123. A compound as defined in claim 119 wherein aryl is biphenyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
124. A compound as defined in claim 119 wherein aryl is thienyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
125. A compound as defined in claim 119 wherein aryl is furyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
126. A compound as defined in claim 119 wherein aryl is pyridyl, or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
127. A compound as defined in claim 1 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000155_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
128. A compound as defined in claim 1 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000156_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
129. A compound as defined in claim 63 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000156_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
130. A compound as defined in claim 63 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000156_0003
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
131. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000157_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
132. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000157_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
133. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000157_0003
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
134. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000158_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
135. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000158_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
136. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000158_0003
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
137. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000159_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
138. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000159_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
139. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000159_0003
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
140. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000160_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
141. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000160_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
142. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000160_0003
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
143. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000161_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
144. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000161_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
145. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000161_0003
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
146. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000162_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
147. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000162_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
148. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000162_0003
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
149. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000163_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
150. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000163_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
151. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000163_0003
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
152. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000164_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
153. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000164_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof. 154. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000164_0003
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
155. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000165_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
156. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000165_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
157. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000165_0003
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
158. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000166_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
159. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000166_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
160. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000166_0003
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
161. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000167_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
162. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000167_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
163. A compound with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000167_0003
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
164. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000168_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
165. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000168_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
166. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000168_0003
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
167. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000169_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
168. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000169_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
169. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000169_0003
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
170. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000170_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
171. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000170_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
172. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000170_0003
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
173. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000171_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
174. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000171_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
175. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000171_0003
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
176. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000172_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
177. A compound with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000172_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
178. A compound as defined in claim 39 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000172_0003
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
179. A compound as defined in claim 39 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000172_0004
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
180. A compound as defined in claim 39 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000173_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
181. A compound as defined in claim 39 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000173_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
182. A compound as defined in claim 39 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000173_0003
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
183. A compound as defined in claim 39 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000174_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
184. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000174_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
185. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000174_0003
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
186. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000175_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
187. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000175_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
189. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000175_0003
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
190. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000176_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
191. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000176_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
192. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000176_0003
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
193. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000177_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
194. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000177_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
195. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000178_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
196. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000178_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
197. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000178_0003
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
198. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000179_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
199. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000179_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
200. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000180_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
201. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000180_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
202. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000180_0003
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
203. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000181_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
204. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000181_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
205. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000181_0003
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
206. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000182_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
207. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000182_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
208. A compound as defined in claim 47 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000183_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
209. A compound as defined in claim 63 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000183_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
210. A compound as defined in claim 24 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000183_0003
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
211. A compound as defined in claim 24 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000184_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
212. A compound as defined in claim 24 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000184_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
213. A compound as defined in claim 24 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000184_0003
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
214. A compound as defined in claim 24 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000185_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
215. A compound as defined in claim 24 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000185_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
216. A compound as defined in claim 24 with the structure as depicted below
C02H
Figure imgf000185_0003
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
217. A compound as defined in claim 24 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000186_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
218. A compound as defined in claim 24 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000186_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
219. A compound as defined in claim 24 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000187_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
220. A compound as defined in claim 24 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000187_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
221. A compound as defined in claim 24 with the structure as depicted below
CO2H
Figure imgf000187_0003
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
222. A compound as defined in claim 24 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000188_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
223. A compound as defined in claim 24 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000188_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
224. A compound as defined in claim 24 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000188_0003
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
225. A compound as defined in claim 24 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000189_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
226. A compound as defined in claim 24 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000189_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
227. A compound as defined in claim 24 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000189_0003
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
228. A compound as defined in claim 24 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000190_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
229. A compound as defined in claim 55 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000190_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
230. A compound as defined in claim 71 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000190_0003
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
231. A compound as defined in claim 79 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000191_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
232. A compound as defined in claim 79 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000191_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
233. A compound as defined in claim 79 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000191_0003
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
234. A compound as defined in claim 79 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000192_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
235. A compound as defined in claim 79 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000192_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
236. A compound as defined in claim 79 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000192_0003
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
237. A compound as defined in claim 87 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000193_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
238. A compound as defined in claim 87 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000193_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
239. A compound as defined in claim 95 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000193_0003
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
240. A compound as defined in claim 103 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000194_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
241. A compound as defined in claim 103 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000194_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
242. A compound as defined in claim 111 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000194_0003
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
243. A compound as defined in claim 111 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000194_0004
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
244. A compound as defined in claim 111 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000195_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
245. A compound as defined in claim 111 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000195_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
246. A compound as defined in claim 111 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000196_0001
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
247. A compound as defined in claim 119 with the structure as depicted below
Figure imgf000196_0002
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, esters, or solvates thereof.
248. A pharmaceutical composition comprising as active component a compound according to any one of the preceding compound claims together with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.
249. A pharmaceutical composition suitable for modulating the activity of
PTPases or other molecules with tyrosine phosphate recognition unit(s) comprising an effective amount of a compound according to any one of the preceding compound claims together with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.
250. The pharmaceutical composition according to any one of the claims 248 or 249 suitable for treating or preventing type I diabetes, type II diabetes, impaired glucose tolerance, insuline resistance, obesity, immune dysfunctions including autoimmunity and AIDS, diseases with dysfunctions of the coagulation system, allergic diseases, osteoperosis, proliferative disorders including cancer and psoriosis, diseases with decreased or increased synthesis or effects of growth hormone, diseases with decreased or increased synthesis of hormones or cytokines that regulate the release of/or response to growth hormone, diseases of the brain including Alzheimer's disease and schizophrnia, and infectious diseases.
251. The pharmaceutical composition according to any one of the claims 248, 249 or 250 comprising between 0.5mg and lOOOmg of a compound according to any one of the preceding compound claims per unit dose.
252. A method of modulating the activity of PTPases or other molecules with phosphotyrosine recognition unit(s) in a subject in need of such treatment comprising administering to said subject an effective amount of a compound or composition according to any one of the preceding compound or composition claims.
253. The use of a compound according to any one of the preceding compound claims for preparing a medicament.
254. The use of a compound according to any one of the preceding compound claims for preparing a medicament for modulating the activity of PTPases or other molecules with phosphotyrosine recognition unit(s).
255. The use of a compound according to any one of the preceding compound claims for preparing a medicament for treating or preventing type I diabetes, type II diabetes, impaired glucose tolerance, insuline resistance, obesity, immune dysfunctions including autoimmunity and AIDS, diseases with dysfunctions of the coagulation system, allergic diseases, osteoperosis, proliferative disorders including cancer and psoriosis, diseases with decreased or increased synthesis or effects of growth hormone, diseases with decreased or increased synthesis of hormones or cytokines that regulate the release of/or response to growth hormone, diseases of the brain including Alzheimer's disease and schizophrnia, and infectious diseases.
256. The use of a compound according to any one of the preceding compound claims for preparing a medicament for treating a subject in need of such treatment.
257. The use of a compound according to any one of the preceding compound claims for preparing a medicament for use as an immunosuppressant.
258. An immobilized compound comprising a suitable solid-phase coupled with a compound according to any one of the preceding compound claim.
259. A method for coupling a compound according to any one of the preceding compound claims to a suitable solid-phase matrix.
260. A method for isolating a protein or a glycoprotein with affinity for a compound according to any one of the preceding compound claims from a biological sample, comprising
- contacting an immobilized compound according to claim 258 with said biological sample in order for said immobilized compound to form a complex by binding said protein or glycoprotein
- removing unbound material from said biological sample and isolating said complex
- extracting said protein or glycoprotein from said complex.
261. A method for isolating a protein-tyrosine phosphatase with affinity for a compound according to any one of the preceding compound claims from a biological sample, comprising
- contacting an immobilized compound according to claim 258 with said biological sample in order for said immobilized compound to form a complex by binding said protein-tyrosine phosphatase
- removing unbound material from said biological sample and isolating said complex
- extracting said protein-tyrosine phosphatase from said complex.
262. A method for isolating a Src-homology 2 domain containing protein or a phosphotyrosine binding domain containg protein with affinity for a compound according to any one of the preceding compound claims from a biological sample, comprising - contacting an immobilized compound according to claim 258 with said biological sample in order for said immobilized compound to form a complex by binding said Src-homology 2 domain containing protein or a phosphotyrosine binding domain containg protein
- removing unbound material from said biological sample and isolating said complex
- extracting said Src-homology 2 domain containing protein or a phosphotyrosine binding domain containg protein from said complex.
263. A compound according to any one of the preceding compound claims coupled to a fluorescent or radioactive molecule.
264. A method for coupling a fluorescent or radioactive molecule to a compound according to any one of the preceding compound claims comprising - contacting said compound with said fluorescent or radioactive molecule in a reaction mixture to produce a complex
- removing uncomplexed material and isolating said complex from said reaction mixture.
265. A method for detecting a protein-tyrosine phosphatase or other molecules with phosphotyrosine recognition unit(s) in a cell or in a subject using a compound according to claim 263 comprising
- contacting said cell or an extract thereof or a biological sample from said subject or by injecting said compound into said subject in order for said compound to produce a complex with said protein-tyrosine phosphatase or said other molecules with phosphotyrosine recognition unit(s)
- detecting said complex, thereby detecting the presence of said protein- tyrosine phosphatase or said other molecules with phosphotyrosine recognition unit(s).
266. A method for quantifying the amount of protein-tyrosine phosphatase or other molecules with phosphotyrosine recognition unit(s) in a cell or in a subject using a compound according to claim 263 comprising - contacting said cell or an extract thereof or a biological sample from said subject or by injecting said compound into said subject in order for said compound to produce a complex with said protein-tyrosine phosphatase or said other molecules with phosphotyrosine recognition unit(s)
- measuring the amount of said complex, thereby detecting the presence of said protein-tyrosine phosphatase or said other molecules with phosphotyrosine recognition unit(s).
267. A method for determining the function of a given protein-tyrosine phosphatase or group of protein-tyrosine phosphatases or said molecules with phosphotyrosine recognition unit(s) in a cell or in a subject using a compound according to claim 263 comprising
- contacting said cell or an extract thereof or a biological sample from said subject or by injecting said compound into said subject in order for said compound to produce a complex with said protein-tyrosine phosphatase or said other molecules with phosphotyrosine recognition unit(s)
- measuring the biological effects induced by said complex.
PCT/US1996/020508 1995-06-19 1996-12-16 Modulators of proteins with phosphotyrosine recognition units WO1998027065A1 (en)

Priority Applications (8)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US08/543,630 US5770620A (en) 1995-06-19 1995-10-16 Aryl acrylic acid derivatives useful as protein tyrosine phosphatase inhibitors
EP96940489A EP0833629A4 (en) 1995-06-19 1996-06-19 Aryl acrylic acid derivatives useful as protein tyrosine phosphatase inhibitors
EP96945409A EP0946518A1 (en) 1996-12-16 1996-12-16 Modulators of proteins with phosphotyrosine recognition units
AU15667/97A AU740425B2 (en) 1996-12-16 1996-12-16 Modulators of proteins with phosphotyrosine recognition units
US08/766,114 US5753687A (en) 1995-06-19 1996-12-16 Modulators of proteins with phosphotryrosine recognition units
PCT/US1996/020508 WO1998027065A1 (en) 1996-12-16 1996-12-16 Modulators of proteins with phosphotyrosine recognition units
CA002275610A CA2275610A1 (en) 1996-12-16 1996-12-16 Modulators of proteins with phosphotyrosine recognition units
JP52765098A JP2001506997A (en) 1996-12-16 1996-12-16 Modifiers of proteins with phosphotyrosine recognition units

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/US1996/020508 WO1998027065A1 (en) 1996-12-16 1996-12-16 Modulators of proteins with phosphotyrosine recognition units

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO1998027065A1 true WO1998027065A1 (en) 1998-06-25

Family

ID=22256341

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US1996/020508 WO1998027065A1 (en) 1995-06-19 1996-12-16 Modulators of proteins with phosphotyrosine recognition units

Country Status (5)

Country Link
EP (1) EP0946518A1 (en)
JP (1) JP2001506997A (en)
AU (1) AU740425B2 (en)
CA (1) CA2275610A1 (en)
WO (1) WO1998027065A1 (en)

Cited By (15)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6498182B2 (en) 2000-09-26 2002-12-24 Biovitrum Ab Compounds
DE10150172A1 (en) * 2001-10-11 2003-04-30 Morphochem Ag New 5-amino-4-phenyl-1H-imidazole derivatives useful as protein tyrosine phosphatase 1B inhibitors, for treating e.g. diabetes and obesity
WO2003037332A1 (en) * 2001-10-12 2003-05-08 Bayer Pharmaceuticals Corporation Phenyl substituted 5-membered nitrogen containing heterocycles for the treatment of obesity
WO2003040107A1 (en) * 2001-09-24 2003-05-15 Bayer Pharmaceuticals Corporation Imidazole-4-carboxamide derivatives, preparation and use thereof for treatment of obesity
US6613903B2 (en) 2000-07-07 2003-09-02 Novo Nordisk A/S Modulators of protein tyrosine phosphatases (PTPases)
WO2004016086A3 (en) * 2002-08-19 2004-04-29 Lorus Therapeutics Inc 2,4,5-trisubstituted imidazoles and their use as anti-microbial agents
WO2004071447A2 (en) * 2003-02-12 2004-08-26 Transtech Pharma Inc. Substituted azole derivatives as therapeutic agents
US7141596B2 (en) 2003-10-08 2006-11-28 Incyte Corporation Inhibitors of proteins that bind phosphorylated molecules
CN101810608A (en) * 2009-02-24 2010-08-25 中国人民解放军第二军医大学 Anti-tumor small molecule compound targeting at human phosphatidylethanolamine-bindingprotein-4
US8148392B2 (en) 2005-05-25 2012-04-03 Lorus Therapeutics Inc. 2-indolyl imidazo [4,5-d] phenanthroline derivatives and their use in the treatment of cancer
US8969372B2 (en) 2003-11-14 2015-03-03 Aptose Boisciences Inc. Aryl imidazoles and their use as anti-cancer agents
US9309247B2 (en) 2013-03-20 2016-04-12 Lorus Therapeutics Inc. 2-substituted imidazo[4,5-D]phenanthroline derivatives and their use in the treatment of cancer
US11104957B2 (en) 2013-10-04 2021-08-31 Aptose Biosciences, Inc. Compositions and methods for treating cancers
US11149047B2 (en) 2017-10-30 2021-10-19 Aptose Biosciences, Inc. Aryl imidazoles for treatment of cancer
KR20220064450A (en) * 2020-11-11 2022-05-19 주식회사 엘지화학 Novel compound and organic light emitting device comprising the same

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101374835B (en) * 2006-01-30 2012-04-25 转化技术制药公司 Substituted imidazole derivatives, compositions, and methods of use as PTPase inhibitors

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5312828A (en) * 1989-06-14 1994-05-17 Finkelstein Joseph A Substituted imidazoles having angiotensin II receptor blocking activity
US5389619A (en) * 1992-04-04 1995-02-14 Basf Aktiengesellschaft Derivatives of phenylacetic acid, their preparation and their use as pesticides
US5521206A (en) * 1991-04-26 1996-05-28 Bayer Aktiengesellschaft Heterocyclically substituted phenylacetic acid derivatives and their use in medicaments

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5312828A (en) * 1989-06-14 1994-05-17 Finkelstein Joseph A Substituted imidazoles having angiotensin II receptor blocking activity
US5521206A (en) * 1991-04-26 1996-05-28 Bayer Aktiengesellschaft Heterocyclically substituted phenylacetic acid derivatives and their use in medicaments
US5389619A (en) * 1992-04-04 1995-02-14 Basf Aktiengesellschaft Derivatives of phenylacetic acid, their preparation and their use as pesticides

Cited By (27)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6613903B2 (en) 2000-07-07 2003-09-02 Novo Nordisk A/S Modulators of protein tyrosine phosphatases (PTPases)
US6498182B2 (en) 2000-09-26 2002-12-24 Biovitrum Ab Compounds
WO2003040107A1 (en) * 2001-09-24 2003-05-15 Bayer Pharmaceuticals Corporation Imidazole-4-carboxamide derivatives, preparation and use thereof for treatment of obesity
US6960601B2 (en) 2001-09-24 2005-11-01 Bayer Pharmaceuticals Corporation Preparation and use of imidazole derivatives for treatment of obesity
DE10150172A1 (en) * 2001-10-11 2003-04-30 Morphochem Ag New 5-amino-4-phenyl-1H-imidazole derivatives useful as protein tyrosine phosphatase 1B inhibitors, for treating e.g. diabetes and obesity
WO2003037332A1 (en) * 2001-10-12 2003-05-08 Bayer Pharmaceuticals Corporation Phenyl substituted 5-membered nitrogen containing heterocycles for the treatment of obesity
US7884120B2 (en) 2002-08-19 2011-02-08 Lorus Therapeutics Inc. 2,4,5-trisubstituted imidazoles and their use as anti-microbial agents
WO2004016086A3 (en) * 2002-08-19 2004-04-29 Lorus Therapeutics Inc 2,4,5-trisubstituted imidazoles and their use as anti-microbial agents
US8987305B2 (en) 2002-08-19 2015-03-24 Aptose Biosciences Inc. 2,4,5-trisubstituted imidazoles and their use as anti-microbial agents
US20130177632A1 (en) * 2002-08-19 2013-07-11 Raed H. Al-Qawasmeh 2,4,5-trisubstituted imidazoles and their use as anti-microbial agents
AU2003257329B2 (en) * 2002-08-19 2009-11-19 Lorus Therapeutics Inc. 2,4,5-trisubstituted imidazoles and their use as anti-microbial agents
AU2003257329C1 (en) * 2002-08-19 2010-07-22 Lorus Therapeutics Inc. 2,4,5-trisubstituted imidazoles and their use as anti-microbial agents
US8394815B2 (en) 2002-08-19 2013-03-12 Lorus Therapeutics Inc. 2,4,5-trisubstituted imidazoles and their use as anti-microbial agents
WO2004071447A2 (en) * 2003-02-12 2004-08-26 Transtech Pharma Inc. Substituted azole derivatives as therapeutic agents
WO2004071447A3 (en) * 2003-02-12 2004-12-23 Transtech Pharma Inc Substituted azole derivatives as therapeutic agents
US7141596B2 (en) 2003-10-08 2006-11-28 Incyte Corporation Inhibitors of proteins that bind phosphorylated molecules
US10080739B2 (en) 2003-11-14 2018-09-25 Aptose Biosciences Inc. Aryl imidazoles and their use as anti-cancer agents
US8969372B2 (en) 2003-11-14 2015-03-03 Aptose Boisciences Inc. Aryl imidazoles and their use as anti-cancer agents
US8148392B2 (en) 2005-05-25 2012-04-03 Lorus Therapeutics Inc. 2-indolyl imidazo [4,5-d] phenanthroline derivatives and their use in the treatment of cancer
CN101810608A (en) * 2009-02-24 2010-08-25 中国人民解放军第二军医大学 Anti-tumor small molecule compound targeting at human phosphatidylethanolamine-bindingprotein-4
US9309247B2 (en) 2013-03-20 2016-04-12 Lorus Therapeutics Inc. 2-substituted imidazo[4,5-D]phenanthroline derivatives and their use in the treatment of cancer
US11104957B2 (en) 2013-10-04 2021-08-31 Aptose Biosciences, Inc. Compositions and methods for treating cancers
US11149047B2 (en) 2017-10-30 2021-10-19 Aptose Biosciences, Inc. Aryl imidazoles for treatment of cancer
KR20220064450A (en) * 2020-11-11 2022-05-19 주식회사 엘지화학 Novel compound and organic light emitting device comprising the same
WO2022102992A1 (en) * 2020-11-11 2022-05-19 주식회사 엘지화학 Novel compound and organic light-emitting device using same
CN116018338A (en) * 2020-11-11 2023-04-25 株式会社Lg化学 Novel compound and organic light-emitting device containing it
KR102623893B1 (en) 2020-11-11 2024-01-11 주식회사 엘지화학 Novel compound and organic light emitting device comprising the same

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
AU740425B2 (en) 2001-11-01
AU1566797A (en) 1998-07-15
EP0946518A1 (en) 1999-10-06
JP2001506997A (en) 2001-05-29
CA2275610A1 (en) 1998-06-25

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US6388076B1 (en) Protein tyrosine phosphatase-inhibiting compounds
US5753687A (en) Modulators of proteins with phosphotryrosine recognition units
AU740425B2 (en) Modulators of proteins with phosphotyrosine recognition units
US6150532A (en) Modulators of proteins with phosphotyrosine recognition units
EP1436291B1 (en) Indolizines as kinase protein inhibitors
EP2687531B1 (en) Tetrahydrocarboline derivative
EP1381602A1 (en) Heterocyclyldicarbamides as caspase inhibitors
US5420133A (en) Quinazolinones substituted with phenoxyphenylacetic acid derivatives
US5686478A (en) Endothelin antagonists
CN109928972A (en) A kind of matrine derivative and its application in drug
JP2002510623A (en) Antidiabetic drugs
AU713863B2 (en) Aryl acrylic acid derivatives useful as protein tyrosine phosphatase inhibitors
CN115028679A (en) PROTAC compound with Cyclophilin A degradation activity and preparation method and application thereof
CN115028680A (en) PROTAC compound for targeted degradation of Cyclophilin A and preparation method and application thereof
JP2000509373A (en) Modulators of molecules with phosphotyrosine recognition units
US20020049316A1 (en) Protease inhibitors
US7183311B2 (en) NF-κB inhibitors
CN116396284B (en) Benzo-7-membered nitrogen-oxygen heterocyclic indole-2-carboxamide derivatives and preparation methods and uses thereof
JP2002523486A (en) N-Hydroxyacylamino compounds, methods for their preparation, and pharmaceutical compositions containing them
JP2765001B2 (en) Protease inhibitor
JPH1087567A (en) Phenol ester derivative, its production and use
KR960008242B1 (en) Benzoxadione derivatives
CN113387909A (en) Medical application of 2, 3-epoxysuccinyl derivative
US6077849A (en) Antidiabetic agents
JP2003533506A (en) N-substituted peptidyl nitrile

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AU CA JP

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AT BE CH DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE

DFPE Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101)
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2275610

Country of ref document: CA

Ref country code: CA

Ref document number: 2275610

Kind code of ref document: A

Format of ref document f/p: F

Ref country code: JP

Ref document number: 1998 527650

Kind code of ref document: A

Format of ref document f/p: F

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1996945409

Country of ref document: EP

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 1996945409

Country of ref document: EP

WWW Wipo information: withdrawn in national office

Ref document number: 1996945409

Country of ref document: EP

点击 这是indexloc提供的php浏览器服务，不要输入任何密码和下载